Systems and methods for engineering nucleic acid constructs using scoring techniques

ABSTRACT

Systems and methods are provided for defining a nucleic acid construct for integration at locus L of an organism. Nucleic acid requests are received, each such request specifying a genetic change to L. The request are expanded into component polynucleotides which are then arranged into {AR 1 , . . . , AR m } different arrangements, each AR i  in {AR 1 , . . . , AR m } defining a different arrangement of the component polynucleotides. A score S i  for each AR i  in {AR 1 , . . . , AR m } is determined based on whether source constructs encoding a portion of AR i  are physically present. An AR f  in {AR 1 , . . . , AR m } is selected based on the score for AR f . Primer pairs are calculated to amplify the portions of AR f  not represented in the source constructs. The portions of AR f  amplified by the primer pairs and the portions of AR f  in the source constructs, ordered by AR f , define the nucleic acid construct.

This application claims benefit under 35 U.S.C. §119(e) of U.S.Provisional Application No. 61/561,241, filed on Nov. 17, 2011, which isincorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.

1. FIELD

The present disclosure relates generally to the field of recombinant DNAtechnology and, more particularly, to improved systems, compositions,and methods for the ordered assembly of component polynucleotides intoengineered nucleic acid constructs in a rapid and cost efficient mannerusing available resources.

2. BACKGROUND

A prominent goal of synthetic biology is to produce novel biologicalsystems that carry out specified desired functions such as theincorporation of biosynthetic pathways into host cells. As such,synthetic biology requires tools for the selection of genetic componentsthat are inserted or removed from host cells, as well as tools forselective mutation of genetic components within host cells.

One application of synthetic biology is the development of novelisoprenoid synthesis pathways in yeast in order to manufactureisoprenoids at reduced costs relative to conventional techniques.Conventional techniques for manufacturing many isoprenoids, a diversefamily of over 40,000 individual compounds, requires their extractionfrom natural sources such as plants, microbes, and animals. Theelucidation of the mevalonate-dependent (MEV) anddeoxyxylulose-5-phosphate (DXP) metabolic pathways has made biosyntheticproduction of some isoprenoids feasible. For instance, microbes havebeen engineered to overexpress a part of or the entire MEV metabolicpathway for production of an isoprenoid named amorpha-4, II-diene. SeeU.S. Pat. Nos. 7,172,886 and 7,192,751, which are hereby incorporated byreference.

U.S. Pat. No. 7,659,097 discloses how the activity of the MEV and DXPpathways can be altered in a number of ways in order to increase thesynthesis of various isoprenoids. Such alterations include, but are notlimited to, expressing a modified form of any respective enzyme in theMEV or DXP pathways so that they exhibit increased solubility in thehost cell, expression of an altered form of the respective enzyme thatlacks a domain through which the activity of the enzyme is inhibited,expressing a modified form of the respective enzyme that has a higherKcat or a lower Km for its substrate, or expressing an altered form ofthe respective enzyme that is not affected by feed-back or feed-forwardregulation by another molecule in the pathway. Moreover, the nucleicacid sequences encoding the enzymes in such synthetic pathways can bemodified to reflect the codon preference of the host cell in order toeffect a higher expression of such enzymes in the host cell. Furtherstill, multiple copies of enzymes in such biosynthetic pathways may beintroduced into host cells to effect a higher expression of suchenzymes. Further still, such enzymes may be placed under the control ofpowerful promoters in the host cell to effect a higher expression ofsuch enzymes. See U.S. Pat. No. 7,569,097, which is hereby incorporatedby reference. The above illustrates just some of the many changes to thelocus of a host cell or organism that are made in order to realize asynthetic biology design goal such as the manufacture of isoprenoids.

As the above illustrates, the realization of synthetic biology goals isbest achieved through an iterative trial and error approach in whichtens, hundreds, or even thousands of different design attempts aretested in vivo in a host cell or organism on a periodic basic (e.g.,daily, weekly, monthly) to determine if a design goal has been reachedand to improve upon such design goals. As such, it is clear that what isneeded in the art are improved platforms for realizing such design goalsfaster, more efficiently, and in an even more economical fashion.

One facet of a platform for realizing synthetic biology design goals ismechanisms for reducing design goals into a form that is interpretableby a compiler. In one approach, Pedersen and Phillips, 2009, “Towardsprogramming languages for genetic engineering of living cells”, J. R.Soc. Interface 6, S437-S450 provide a formal language for geneticengineering of living cells (GEC) in which one or more in silicodatabases of parts are searched by a compiler for a set of parts thatsatisfy a design goal. See also, U.S. Patent Application Publication No.2011/0054654 in which GEC is also described. The work of Pedersen andcoworkers provides a satisfactory framework for modeling complexpathways in silico. Such in silico models can then be used to make insilico predictions on what changes to the model would achieve a desireddesign goal. However, the data that would make such in silico modelingmore useful, such as the molecular properties of a number of componentsof molecular pathways under a number of different reaction conditions,is presently unavailable. Consequently, to date, the work of Pedersonand coworkers has not eliminated the need for an iterative trial anderror approach to realizing a synthetic biology design goal in whichtens, hundreds, or even thousands of different design attempts aretested in vivo on a periodic basic (e.g., daily, weekly, monthly).

The drawbacks of iterative trial and error approaches are the time andcosts that such approaches take. It takes extensive resources, includingtime and money, to make all the constructs necessary for a designattempt and to test the design attempt in vivo. For each design attempt,the constructs, termed engineered nucleic acid constructs, which effectthe desired changes to the locus of a host cell or organism, need to bemade. This often requires the custom synthesis of oligonucleotideprimers in order to subclone desired nucleic acid components from agenomic library and/or to effect desired mutations in existing nucleicacid sequences. Such engineered nucleic acid constructs are thenintroduced into a host cell or organism where they either recombine witha locus of the host genome or exist in a stable vector form. As such,the design of even a limited number of engineered nucleic acidconstructs may require the synthesis of dozens or even hundreds ofcustom oligonucleotide primers in order to make the needed engineerednucleic acid constructs using existing template nucleic acids, such asexisting constructs or nucleic acids in a genomic library.

Thus, despite advances in the field of synthetic biology, there remainsa need for improved systems, compositions, and methods that provide forthe rapid and ordered assembly of nucleic acid components intoengineered nucleic acid constructs. Particularly needed are systems andmethods that reduce the cost and increase the speed of the iterativetrial and error approach that is used in synthetic biology applications,including the construction of engineered nucleic acid constructs. Theseand other needs are met by systems, compositions, and methods of thepresent disclosure.

3. SUMMARY

The present disclosure addresses the shortcomings of known approaches tosynthetic biology. In the present disclosure, a robust language isprovided for describing nucleic acid requests. These nucleic acidrequests are interpreted and expanded into a plurality of componentnucleic acids in a contiguous arrangement. A database of physicallypresent component polynucleic acids is searched to see if any of thecomponent nucleic acids in the contiguous arrangement already exist. Insome embodiments, and where possible, the order of individual componentpolynucleic acids in the plurality of component polynucleic acids isrearranged, often several times, to see if such contiguousrearrangements lead to the identification of a larger number ofcomponent polynucleic acids in the database of physically presentcomponent polynucleic acids. A contiguous arrangement of the pluralityof component nucleic acids that is best represented by the database ofphysically present component polynucleic acids is selected. Primer pairsare generated for the portions of the selected contiguous arrangementnot present in the database. The portions of the contiguous arrangementamplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the database identified for the selected contiguousarrangement collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct.These components can be used to rapidly assemble the engineered nucleicacid construct in a faster, more efficient manner than conventionaliterative trial and error approaches to pursuing a synthetic biologydesign goal.

One aspect provides a method of defining an engineered nucleic acidconstruct for integration into a genomic locus L of a target organism ora host cell. A plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}is received from a requester through a computer interface. Here, n is apositive integer greater than 1. In some embodiments, n is an integer inthe range 1 to 100. Each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} specifies a genetic change to L, for example, a request toinsert an exogenous promoter-gene unit at L. Each nucleic request NR_(i)in the plurality of {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} is expanded into acorresponding component polynucleotide, thereby forming a plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides. The type of expansion that is performed inthis step depends on the nature of each NR_(i). In some embodiments,NR_(i) includes the full nucleic acid sequence of what is to be insertedat L. In such embodiments, since the nucleic acid sequence is fullydescribed, the expansion step does not accomplish any actual expansionof the nucleic acid request. In some embodiments NR_(i) is a request fora point mutation of a given gene. To ease the work on the request,advantageously, NR_(i) may use abbreviated notation to identify the geneand the point mutation that is requested. Such abbreviated notation isdescribed more fully below. In this instance, the expansion stepvalidates that the name of the gene identified in NR_(i) is a validgene, retrieves the nucleic acid sequence for the gene, and makes therequested point mutation.

Once the expansion step is complete, the plurality of {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} is represented as a plurality of component polynucleotides. Theplurality of component polynucleotides is arranged into a contiguousarrangement AR_(i) using linker nucleic acid sequences from apredetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequences to form thearrangement AR_(i). This arranging is done a number of times, either inconcurrent or sequential arrangement steps, until a set of {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)} contiguous arrangements is formed. This is done because,typically, several different arrangements of the componentpolynucleotides, each of which fully comply with the requirements of{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, exists. Thus, m is a positive integer greaterthan 1, and, in fact, often much larger than 1. For example, m can be 5or greater in some embodiments. A score S_(i) is determined for eachrespective contiguous arrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}. Insome embodiments, the scoring step is done after each arrangement AR_(i)is made rather than waiting until the set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} hasbeen defined. In such embodiments, the cycle of arranging and scoring isterminated as soon as a satisfactory arrangement is found.

For each respective contiguous arrangement AR_(i), a contribution to thescore S_(i) for the contiguous arrangement is made when one or moresource constructs are identified as being physically present in afreezer store. Each such physically present source construct encodes oneor more of the component polynucleotides. Moreover, in some embodiments,a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of each respectivecomponent polynucleotide of the one or more component polynucleotidesencoded by the one or more physically present source constructs is boundto a corresponding linker nucleic acid sequence that was used for thecorresponding component polynucleotide in the arranging to form AR_(i).To illustrate, consider the case where there is a componentpolynucleotide CP with a 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence LB₂ (i.e.,5′-CP-LB₂-3′) in AR_(i). What is desired is a component polynucleotideCP encoded by the one or more physically present source constructs witha 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence LB₂ (i.e., 5′-CP-LB₂-3′).

A final contiguous arrangement AR_(f) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} isselected that has a score S_(i) that meets a selection criterion. Inresponse to selection of the AR_(f), one or more primer pairs iscalculated based on the AR_(f), where each primer pair in the one ormore primer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion of AR_(f) notrepresented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(f). The portions of the contiguous arrangementamplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(f), in the order specified in the AR_(f),collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct. At leastportions of the above-identified method (e.g., the expanding, arranging,repeating, determining, selecting, or calculating described above) isperformed using one or more suitably programmed computers.

Another aspect provides an apparatus comprising one or more memories andone or more processors. The one or more memories and the one or moreprocessors are in electronic communication with each other. The one ormore memories tangibly encode a set of instructions for defining anengineered nucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus Lof a target organism or a host cell using the one or more processors.The set of instructions comprise instructions for receiving a pluralityof nucleic acid requests {NR1, . . . , NR_(n)}, where n is a positiveinteger greater than 1, each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . ., NR_(n)} specifying a genetic change to L. The set of instructionsfurther comprise instructions for expanding each NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} into a corresponding component polynucleotide, thereby forming aplurality of component polynucleotides. The set of instructions furthercomprise instructions for arranging the plurality of componentpolynucleotides into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), where thearranging uses linker nucleic acid sequences from a predeterminedlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences to combine componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides into acontiguous arrangement AR_(i). The set of instructions further compriseinstructions for repeating the instructions for arranging until a set of{AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} contiguous arrangements are formed, where m is apositive integer greater than 1. The set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}contiguous arrangements represent a plurality of different contiguousarrangements of the component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides. The set of instructions further compriseinstructions for determining a score S_(i) for each respectivecontiguous arrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}. For eachrespective contiguous arrangement AR_(i), a contribution to the scoreS_(i) is made when one or more source constructs are identified as beingphysically present in a freezer store, where each of the one or morephysically present source constructs encode one or more of the componentpolynucleotides, and where a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in the one or morecomponent polynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically presentsource constructs is bound to a corresponding linker that was used forthe corresponding component polynucleotide in the instructions forarranging to form AR_(i). The set of instructions further compriseinstructions for selecting a final contiguous arrangement AR_(f) in{AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} having a score S_(i) that meets a selectioncriterion as an optimal contiguous arrangement. The set of instructionsfurther comprise instructions for calculating one or more primer pairsbased upon the final contiguous arrangement AR_(f), where each primerpair in the one or more primer pairs is capable of amplifying a portionof AR_(f) not represented in the one or more component polynucleotidesin the one or more physically present source constructs identified forthe AR_(f). The portions of the contiguous arrangement amplified by theone or more primer pairs and the one or more component polynucleotidesin the one or more physically present source constructs identified forAR_(f), in the order specified in AR_(f), collectively define theengineered nucleic acid construct.

Another aspect provides a method of defining an engineered nucleic acidconstruct for integration into a genomic locus L of a target organism ora host cell. The method comprises receiving a plurality of nucleic acidrequests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, where n is a positive integer greaterthan 1. Each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifies a genetic change to L. Each NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} isexpanded into a corresponding component polynucleotide, thereby forminga plurality of component polynucleotides. The plurality of componentpolynucleotides is arranged into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i). Thisarranging uses linker nucleic acid sequences from a predeterminedlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences to combine componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides into theAR_(i). In response to the arranging, one or more source constructs froma plurality of source constructs physically present in a freezer storeare selected. Each of the one or more physically present sourceconstructs encodes one or more of the component polynucleotides. A 3′ or5′ terminus, or both a 3′ and 5′ termini, of each respective componentpolynucleotide in the one or more component polynucleotides encoded bythe one or more physically present source constructs is bound to acorresponding linker that was used for the corresponding componentpolynucleotide in the arranging to form AR_(i). One or more primer pairsare calculated based upon AR_(i). Each primer pair is capable ofamplifying a portion of AR_(i) not represented in the one or morephysically present source constructs identified for AR_(i). The portionsof the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) amplified by the one or more primerpairs and the one or more component polynucleotides in the one or morephysically present source constructs identified for AR_(i), in the orderspecified by AR_(i), collectively define the engineered nucleic acidconstruct. At least portions of the above-identified method (e.g., theexpanding, arranging, selecting, and/or calculating) is performed usingone or more suitably programmed computers.

Another aspect of the present disclosure provides an apparatuscomprising one or more memories and one or more processors. The one ormore memories and the one or more processors are in electroniccommunication with each other. The one or more memories tangibly encodea set of instructions for defining an engineered nucleic acid constructfor integration into a genomic locus L of a target organism or a hostcell using the one or more processors. In this aspect of the presentdisclosure, the set of instructions comprise instructions for receivinga plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, where n is apositive integer greater than 1. Each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifies a genetic change to L. The set ofinstructions further comprise instructions for expanding each NR_(i) in{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into a corresponding component polynucleotidehaving a nucleic acid sequence, thereby forming a plurality of componentpolynucleotides. The set of instructions further comprise instructionsfor arranging the plurality of component polynucleotides into acontiguous arrangement AR_(i). The arranging uses linker nucleic acidsequences from a predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequencesto combine component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i). The set ofinstructions further comprise instructions for selecting one or moresource constructs from a plurality of source constructs physicallypresent in a freezer store. Each of the one or more physically presentsource constructs encodes one or more of the component polynucleotides.A 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of each respectivecomponent polynucleotide in the one or more component polynucleotidesencoded by the one or more physically present source constructs is boundto a corresponding linker nucleic acid that was used for the respectivecomponent polynucleotide in the arranging to form AR_(i). The set ofinstructions further comprise instructions for calculating one or moreprimer pairs based upon the AR_(i). Each primer pair in the one or moreprimer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion of the AR_(i) notrepresented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), where the portions of the AR_(i) amplified bythe one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), in the order specified by the AR_(i),collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct.

Another aspect of the present disclosure provides a method of defining aplurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)},where k is a positive integer greater than 1. Each engineered nucleicacid construct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} is designed to beintegrated into a genomic locus L of a target organism or a host cell.The method comprises receiving, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . .. , EN_(k)}, a corresponding plurality of {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)}nucleic acid requests. Each nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1),. . . , NR_(i,n)} specifies a genetic change to L. For each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is a positive integer that is thesame or different as n for each other EN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}.In the method, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, eachNR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} is expanded into acorresponding component polynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence,thereby forming a corresponding plurality of component polynucleotides.For each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, the correspondingplurality of component polynucleotides from the expanding is arrangedinto a contiguous arrangement AR_(i). This arranging uses linker nucleicacid sequences from a predetermined library of linker nucleic acidsequences to combine component polynucleotides in the correspondingplurality of component polynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming aplurality of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i)in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} representing an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}. For each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one ormore source constructs from a plurality of source constructs physicallypresent in a freezer store is selected. Each of the one or morephysically present source constructs for a respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, .. . , EN_(k)} encodes one or more of the component polynucleotides inthe plurality of component polynucleotides for the respective EN_(i).Moreover, a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of eachrespective component polynucleotide in the one or more componentpolynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically present sourceconstructs for a respective EN_(i) is bound to a corresponding linkernucleic acid that was used for the respective component polynucleotidein the arranging step above that was used to form AR_(i). For eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN_(i), . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairsbased upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} that represents EN_(i) iscalculated. Each primer pair in the one or more primer pairs for aAR_(i) is capable of amplifying a portion of AR_(i) not represented inthe one or more physically present source constructs identified forAR_(i). The portions of the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) amplified bythe one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(i), in the order specified by AR_(i), collectivelydefine the engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i). In someembodiments, at least one of the aforementioned steps (e.g., theexpanding, arranging, selecting, and/or calculating) is performed usingone or more suitably programmed computers.

Another aspect provides an apparatus comprising one or more memories andone or more processors. The one or more memories and the one or moreprocessors are in electronic communication with each other. The one ormore memories encode a set of instructions for defining a plurality of{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleic acid constructs, where k is apositive integer greater than 1, using the one or more processors. Eachengineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} is forintegration into a genomic locus L of a target organism or a host cell.The set of instructions comprises instructions for receiving, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, a corresponding plurality of{NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} nucleic acid requests. Each nucleic acidrequest NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifies a geneticchange to L. For each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is apositive integer that is the same or different as n for each otherEN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. The set of instructions furthercomprise instructions for expanding, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁,. . . , EN_(k)}, each NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} into acorresponding component polynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence,thereby forming a corresponding plurality of component polynucleotidesfor each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. The set ofinstructions further comprises instructions for arranging, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, the corresponding pluralityof component polynucleotides from the expanding into a contiguousarrangement AR_(i), where the arranging uses linker nucleic acidsequences from a predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequencesto combine component polynucleotides in the corresponding plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming a plurality ofcontiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . .. , AR_(m)} representing a EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. The set ofinstructions further comprises instructions for selecting, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more sourceconstructs from a plurality of source constructs physically present in afreezer store, where each of the one or more physically present sourceconstructs for a respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} encode oneor more of the component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides for the respective EN_(i), and where a 3′ or 5′terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of each respective componentpolynucleotide in the one or more component polynucleotides encoded bythe one or more physically present source constructs for a respectiveEN_(i) is bound to a corresponding linker nucleic acid that was used forthe respective component polynucleotide in the arranging to form AR_(i).The set of instructions further comprise instructions for calculating,for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primerpairs based upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} that representsEN_(i), where each primer pair in the one or more primer pairs iscapable of amplifying a portion of AR_(i) not represented in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i), andwhere the portions of AR_(i) amplified by the one or more primer pairsand the one or more component polynucleotides in the one or morephysically present source constructs identified for AR_(i), in the orderspecified by AR_(i), collectively define the engineered nucleic acidconstruct EN_(i).

Another aspect of the present disclosure provides an apparatuscomprising one or more memories and one or more processors. The one ormore memories and the one or more processors are in electroniccommunication with each other. The one or more memories encode a set ofinstructions for defining a plurality of engineered nucleic acidconstructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, where k is an integer greater than 1.Each engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}is for integration into a genomic locus L of a target organism or a hostcell. The set of instructions comprise instructions for receiving, foreach respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, a correspondingplurality of nucleic acid requests {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} indigital alphanumeric format. Each nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in{NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifies a genetic change to L, where, foreach respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is a positive integerthat is the same or different as n for each other EN_(m) in {EN₁, . . ., EN_(k)}. The set of instructions further comprise instructions forexpanding, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, eachNR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} into a corresponding componentpolynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence, thereby forming acorresponding plurality of component polynucleotides for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. The set of instructions furthercomprise instructions for arranging, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁,. . . , EN_(k)}, the corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides from the instructions for expanding into a contiguousarrangement AR_(i), where the arranging uses linker nucleic acidsequences from a predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequencesto combine component polynucleotides in the plurality of correspondingcomponent polynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming a plurality ofcontiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . .. , AR_(m)} representing an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. The set ofinstructions further comprise instructions for selecting, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more sourceconstructs from a plurality of source constructs physically present in afreezer store, where each of the one or more physically present sourceconstructs for a respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} encodes oneor more of the component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides for the respective EN_(i), and where a 3′ or 5′terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of each respective componentpolynucleotide in the one or more component polynucleotides encoded bythe one or more physically present source constructs for a respectiveEN_(i) is bound to a corresponding linker nucleic acid that was used forthe respective component polynucleotide in the arranging to form AR_(i).The set of instructions further includes instructions for calculating,for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primerpairs based upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} that representsEN_(i), where each primer pair in the one or more primer pairs for anAR_(i) is capable of amplifying a portion of AR_(i) not represented inthe one or more source constructs identified for AR_(i), where theportions of AR_(i) amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the oneor more component polynucleotides in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for AR_(i), in the order specified byAR_(i), collectively define the engineered nucleic acid constructEN_(i).

Another aspect of the present disclosure provides a method for defininga plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleic acid constructs,where k is an integer greater than 1, each engineered nucleic acidconstruct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} for integration into a genomiclocus L of a target organism or a host cell. The method comprisesreceiving, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, acorresponding plurality of {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} nucleic acidrequests in digital alphanumeric format, each nucleic acid requestNR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifying a genetic change toL, where, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is apositive integer that is the same or different as n for each otherEN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. The method further comprises expanding,for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, each NR_(i,j) in{NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} into a corresponding componentpolynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence, thereby forming acorresponding plurality of component polynucleotides for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. The method further comprises arranging,for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, the correspondingplurality of component polynucleotides from the expanding into acontiguous arrangement AR_(i), where the arranging uses linker nucleicacid sequences from a predetermined library of linker nucleic acidsequences to combine component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcorresponding component polynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming aplurality of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(k)}, each AR_(i)in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(k)} representing an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}. The method further comprises selecting, for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more source constructs from aplurality of source constructs physically present in a freezer store,where the one or more physically present source constructs collectivelyencode a portion of the AR_(i) corresponding to EN_(i). The methodfurther comprises calculating, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . ., EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . .. AR_(k)} that represents the respective EN_(i), where each primer pairin the one or more primer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion ofAR_(i) not represented in the one or more physically present sourceconstructs identified for AR_(i), and where the portions of AR_(i)amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(i), in the order specified by AR_(i), collectivelydefine the engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i). The method furthercomprises outputting to a non-transitory computer memory, a persistentdata storage, a monitor, or a printer, for each respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon the AR_(i) in{AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} that represents the respective EN_(i), and the oneor more source constructs identified by the instructions for calculatingfor the respective EN_(i), where at least a portion of theabove-identified method (e.g., the expanding, arranging, selecting,and/or calculating) is performed using a suitably programmed computer.

Another aspect of the present disclosure provides an apparatuscomprising one or more memories and one or more processors. The one ormore memories and the one or more processors are in electroniccommunication with each other. The one or more memories encode a set ofinstructions for defining an engineered nucleic acid construct forintegration into a genomic locus L of a target organism or a host cellusing the one or more processors. The set of instructions compriseinstructions for representing a set of component polynucleotide slots ineither (i) a linear or a near linear contiguous arrangement on a displayor (ii) a vertical or a near vertical arrangement on the display, whereeach component polynucleotide slot in the set of componentpolynucleotide slots is configured to represent a componentpolynucleotide when populated. The set of component polynucleotide slotscollectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct. Moreover, atleast a portion of the set of component polynucleotide slots isinitially unpopulated. The set of instructions further compriseinstructions for receiving a selection of a first componentpolynucleotide slot in the set of component polynucleotide slots. Theset of instructions further comprise instructions for listing, as atable on the display and responsive to receiving the selection of thefirst component polynucleotide slot, a first plurality of componentpolynucleotides physically present in a freezer store that are eligibleto populate the first component polynucleotide slot. The set ofinstructions further comprise instructions for permitting a user topopulate the first component polynucleotide slot with a componentpolynucleotide from the table. The set of instructions further compriseinstructions for receiving a selection of a second componentpolynucleotide slot in the set of component polynucleotide slots. Theset of instructions further comprise instructions for dynamicallyupdating the table on the display, responsive to receiving the selectionof the second component polynucleotide slot, to list a second pluralityof component polynucleotides physically present in the freezer storethat are eligible to populate the second component polynucleotide slot.The set of instructions further comprise instructions for permitting auser to populate the second component polynucleotide slot with acomponent polynucleotide from the table where the componentpolynucleotides used to populate the set of component polynucleotideslots, in the sequential order displayed in the display, define theengineered nucleic acid construct.

Another aspect provides an apparatus comprising one or more memories andone or more processors, where the one or more memories and the one ormore processors are in electronic communication with each other, the oneor more memories encoding a set of instructions for determining whethera nucleic acid sequence is present in any source construct in aplurality of source constructs physically present in a freezer store,using the one or more processors. The set of instructions comprisesinstructions for receiving a first nucleic acid sequence in electronicalphanumeric format using a display in electronic communication with theone or more memories. The set of instructions further comprisesinstructions for receiving a matching threshold criterion using thedisplay. The set of instructions further comprises instructions forcomparing the first nucleic acid sequence with a sequence of eachrespective source construct in the plurality of source constructs,where, when a second nucleic acid sequence that satisfies the matchingthreshold criterion is found within the sequence of a respective sourceconstruct, the instructions for comparing further include instructionsfor displaying an identity of the respective source construct.

4. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 shows an exemplary computer system for defining an engineerednucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus inaccordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary method for defining an engineerednucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus, in whichindividual arrangements of component polynucleotides in a plurality ofdifferent arrangements of component polynucleotides, each suchindividual arrangement encoding a candidate for the engineered nucleicacid construct, are scored based on availability of their componentpolynucleotides in a freezer store, in accordance with an embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 3 illustrates a graphical user interface for inputting one or morepluralities of nucleic acid requests, where each of the one or morepluralities of nucleic acid requests specifies a set of genetic changesthat are to made to a locus, in accordance with an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 4 provides an exemplary plurality of nucleic acid requests,HÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1, in accordance with an embodiment of thepresent disclosure. FIG. 4A illustrates a complete set of possiblecomponent polynucleotides that may be searched in a freezer storedatabase for anexemplary arrangement of the plurality of nucleic acidrequests: 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′, 5′-LA₂-ADH2-LB₂-3′, 5′-LA₃-pSLN1-LB₃-3′,5′-LA₄-ADH1-LB₄-3′, which encodes the plurality of nucleic acid requestsHÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1, in accordance with an embodiment of thepresent disclosure. FIG. 4B illustrates a complete set of possiblesubsets of an exemplary arrangement in a single source construct.

FIG. 5 illustrates the portions of a final arrangement of componentpolynucleotides for an engineered nucleic acid construct that areencoded by matching component polynucleotides in a freezer storedatabase and the portions of the final arrangement that are to be builtusing primer pairs and a nucleic acid library of a target organism or ahost cell in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 6A illustrates an exemplary freezer store database detailing sourceconstructs that are physically present in a corresponding freezer storeand, for each such source construct, the component polynucleotide(inserts) within the source construct in accordance with an embodimentof the present disclosure.

FIG. 6B illustrates another exemplary freezer store database detailingsource constructs that are physically present in a corresponding freezerstore and, for each such source construct, the component polynucleotide(inserts) within the source construct in accordance with an embodimentof the present disclosure.

FIG. 7 illustrates a library of linker nucleic acid sequences includingthe category of each linker nucleic acid sequence in accordance with anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 8 illustrates another exemplary freezer store database detailingsource constructs that are physically present in a corresponding freezerstore and, for each such source construct, the component polynucleotide(inserts) within the source construct and other information inaccordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 9 provides an exemplary method of preparing an entry vector foracceptance of a DNA segment to form an assembly vector. In the exemplarymethod, RY=RZ=SchI. Digestion with SchI, a Type IIS restrictionendonuclease that is capable of producing blunt ends, allows forisolation of the vector with the linker sites open to be fused to theDNA segment (D). Blunt-end ligation of D into the entry vector can beperformed by traditional methods using, e.g., T4 DNA ligase.

FIG. 10 presents a schematic of an assembly composition comprising aplurality of assembly vectors (first, intermediate, and last), eachcomprising a DNA segment of interest (D₀, D_(n), D_(m)). The firstnucleic acid molecule comprises a first restriction site RA₀, a primerbinding segment PA, a DNA segment D₀, an annealable linker sequence LB₀,and a second restriction site RB₀. The one or more intermediate nucleicacid molecules comprise a first restriction site RA_(n), a firstannealable linker sequence LA_(n), a DNA segment D_(n), a secondannealable linker sequence LB_(n), and a second restriction site RBwherein n represents an integer from one to the number of intermediatenucleic acid molecules; and the last nucleic acid molecule comprises afirst restriction site RA_(m), an annealable linker sequence LA_(m), aDNA segment D_(m), a primer binding segment PB, a second restrictionsite RB_(m) wherein m represents an integer one greater than the numberof intermediate nucleic acid molecules.

FIG. 11 presents an exemplary method of assembling, i.e., “stitching” aassembled polynucleotide from four (4) component polynucleotides.Assembly vectors comprising DNA segments to be assembled are pooled in asingle tube and digested with SapI to release component polynucleotidefragments from the assembly vector backbones. Following heatinactivation of SapI, the component polynucleotide fragments aresubjected to denaturing conditions, followed by annealing conditionssufficient for hybridization of the complementary annealable linkerpairs. Following primer extension in the presence of DNA polymerase anddNTPs, primers complementary to PA and PB are added, followed bytraditional PCR amplification. An assembled polynucleotide comprisingcomponent polynucleotides D₀, D₁, D₂, and D₃ assembled in a 5′ to 3′direction is produced as a result of the assembling reaction.

FIG. 12 illustrates an exemplary method for defining an engineerednucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus, in which asingle arrangement of component polynucleotides that encodes a candidatefor the engineered nucleic acid construct is computed and theavailability of component polynucleotides in the arrangement in afreezer store is determined, in accordance with an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 13 illustrates an exemplary method for defining a plurality ofengineered nucleic acid constructs for integration into a genomic locus,in which several different pluralities of nucleic acid requests {NR₁, .. . , NR_(n)} are received and, for each respective plurality of nucleicacid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, an arrangement of componentpolynucleotides that effect the nucleic acid requests of the respectiveplurality of nucleic acid requests is formed and the availability ofcomponent polynucleotides for the arrangement in a freezer store isdetermined, in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 14 illustrates a graphical user interface upon inputting one ormore pluralities of nucleic acid requests, where each of the one or morepluralities of nucleic acid requests specifies a set of genetic changesthat are to be made to a locus, in accordance to an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 15 illustrates a graphical user interface for identifying componentpolynucleotides in a freezer store in accordance with an embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 16 illustrates a graphical user interface for identifying componentpolynucleotides in a freezer store, in which a first componentpolynucleotide has been selected from the freezer store, in accordancewith an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 17 illustrates a graphical user interface for identifying componentpolynucleotides in a freezer store, in which a second componentpolynucleotide has been selected from the freezer store and an icon forthe second component polynucleotide is aligned with an icon for a firstcomponent polynucleotide, in accordance with an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 18 illustrates a graphical user interface for identifying componentpolynucleotides in a freezer store, in which a third componentpolynucleotide has been selected from the freezer store and an icon forthe third component polynucleotide is aligned with icons for a first anda second component polynucleotide, in accordance with an embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 19 illustrates a graphical user interface for identifying componentpolynucleotides in a freezer store, in which selected componentpolynucleotides are sent to a clone manager as a proposed engineerednucleic acid construct, in accordance with an embodiment of thedisclosure.

FIG. 20 illustrates a graphical user interface for searching forpolynucleic acid sequences in a freezer store database that match aquery polynucleic acid sequence. A user pastes or types a polynucleicacid sequence into an interface box and all of the possible matches thatexceed a threshold criterion are displayed.

FIG. 21 illustrates a graphical user interface for searching polynucleicacid sequences in a freezer store database that match a querypolynucleic acid sequence. After a user pastes or types the querypolynucleic acid sequence into an interface box, an alignment of all ofthe possible matches against the query polynucleic acid sequence thatexceed a threshold criterion is displayed.

Like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout theseveral views of the drawings.

5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EMBODIMENTS 5.1 Definitions

As used herein, the term “locus” refers to the chromosomal position atwhich a gene resides. In addition to the intronic and exonic regions ofthe gene, a locus can include regions which regulate the expression ofthe gene product, e.g., promoter sequences, terminators, translationalregulatory sequences such as ribosome binding sites and internalribosome entry sites, enhancers, silencers, insulators, and boundaryelements.

As used herein, the term “selectable marker” refers to wide variety ofselectable markers that are known in the art (see, for example, Kaufman,Meth. Enzymol., 185:487 (1990); Kaufman, Meth. Enzymol., 185:537 (1990);Srivastava and Schlessinger, Gene, 103:53 (1991); Romanos et al., in DNACloning 2: Expression Systems, 2^(nd) Edition, pages 123-167 (IRL Press1995); Markie, Methods Mol. Biol., 54:359 (1996); Pfeifer et al., Gene,188:183 (1997); Tucker and Burke, Gene, 199:25 (1997); Hashida-Okado etal., FEBS Letters, 425:117 (1998)), each of which is hereby incorporatedby reference in their entirety for their teachings on selectablemarkers. One type of selectable marker is a drug resistant marker. Adrug resistant marker enables cells to detoxify an exogenous drug thatwould otherwise kill the cell. Illustrative examples of drug resistantmarkers include, but are not limited to, those which confer resistanceto antibiotics such as ampicillin, tetracycline, kanamycin, bleomycin,streptomycin, hygromycin, neomycin, ZEOCIN™, and the like. In otherembodiments, the selectable marker is an auxotrophic marker. Anauxotrophic marker allows cells to synthesize an essential component,usually an amino acid, while grown in media that lacks that essentialcomponent. Selectable auxotrophic gene sequences include, for example,hisD, which allows growth in histidine free media in the presence ofhistidinol. Other selectable markers include a bleomycin-resistancegene, a metallothionein gene, a hygromycin B-phosphotransferase gene,the AURI gene, an adenosine deaminase gene, an aminoglycosidephosphotransferase gene, a dihydrofolate reductase gene, a thymidinekinase gene, a xanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase gene, and thelike.

As used herein, the terms “polynucleotide” and “nucleic acid sequence”interchangeably refer to a polymer composed of nucleotide units as wouldbe understood by one of skill in the art. Preferred nucleotide unitsinclude but are not limited to those comprising adenine (A), guanine(G), cytosine (C), thymine (T), and uracil (U). Useful modifiednucleotide units include but are not limited to those comprising4-acetylcytidine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl)uridine, 2-O-methylcytidine,5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine,5-carboxymethylamino-methyluridine, dihydrouridine,2-O-methylpseudouridine, 2-O-methylguanosine, inosine,N6-isopentyladenosine, 1-methyladenosine, 1-methylpseudouridine,1-methylguanosine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanosine,2-methyladenosine, 2-methylguanosine, 3-methylcytidine,5-methylcytidine, N6-methyladenosine, 7-methylguanosine,5-methylaminomethyluridine, 5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouridine,5-methoxyuridine, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyl-2-thiouridine,5-methoxycarbonylmethyluridine, 2-methylthio-N6-isopentyladenosine,uridine-5-oxyacetic acid-methylester, uridine-5-oxyacetic acid,wybutoxosine, wybutosine, pseudouridine, queuosine, 2-thiocytidine,5-methyl-2-thiouridine, 2-thiouridine, 4-thiouridine, 5-methyluridine,2-O-methyl-5-methyluridine, 2-O-methyluridine, and the like.Polynucleotides include naturally occurring nucleic acids, such asdeoxyribonucleic acid (“DNA”) and ribonucleic acid (“RNA”), as well asnucleic acid analogs. Nucleic acid analogs include those that includenon-naturally occurring bases, nucleotides that engage in linkages withother nucleotides other than the naturally occurring phosphodiester bondor that include bases attached through linkages other thanphosphodiester bonds. Thus, nucleotide analogs include, for example andwithout limitation, phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates,phosphorotriesters, phosphoramidates, boranophosphates,methylphosphonates, chiral-methyl phosphonates, 2-O-methylribonucleotides, peptide-nucleic acids (PNAs), and the like.

As used herein, an “engineered nucleic acid construct” refers to apolynucleotide produced by the methods of polynucleotide assemblydescribed herein. The assembled polynucleotide can be comprised of thetwo or more component polynucleotides. In some embodiments, theassembled polynucleotide comprises 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,13, 14, 15 or more component polynucleotides. Assembled polynucleotidelength can range from about 100 to about 20,000 nucleotides, or more. Insome embodiments, the assembled polynucleotide length ranges from about200 to about 10,000, about 200 to about 8000, about 200 to about 5000,about 200 to about 3000, or about 200 to about 1000 nucleotides. Inother embodiments, the assembled polynucleotide length can range fromabout 200 to about 2000, about 2000 to about 5000, about 5000 to about10,000, about 10,000 to about 20,000, or greater than 20,000nucleotides.

Conventional notation is used herein to describe polynucleotidesequences: the left-hand end of a single-stranded polynucleotidesequence is the 5′-end; the left-hand direction of a double-strandedpolynucleotide sequence is referred to as the 5′-direction.

As used herein, a “component polynucleotide” refers to a polynucleotidesequence that can be assembled together to form an “engineered nucleicacid construct” using the methods of polynucleotide assembly describedherein. A “component polynucleotide”, alternately referred to as “bits”herein, refers to any isolated or isolatable molecule of DNA. Usefulexamples include but are not limited to a protein-coding sequence,reporter gene, fluorescent marker coding sequence, promoter, enhancer,terminator, intron, exon, poly-A tail, multiple cloning site, nuclearlocalization signal, mRNA stabilization signal, selectable marker,integration loci, epitope tag coding sequence, degradation signal, orany other naturally occurring or synthetic DNA molecule. In someembodiments, the DNA segment can be of natural origin. Alternatively, aDNA segment can be completely of synthetic origin, produced in vitro.Furthermore, a DNA segment can comprise any combination of isolatednaturally occurring DNA molecules, or any combination of an isolatednaturally occurring DNA molecule and a synthetic DNA molecule. Forexample, a DNA segment may comprise a heterologous promoter operablylinked to a protein coding sequence, a protein coding sequence linked toa poly-A tail, a protein coding sequence linked in-frame with a epitopetag coding sequence, and the like.

As used herein, the term “encode,” as used in the context of aconstruct, for example a physically present source construct “encoding”a component polynucleotide, means that the source construct is a nucleicacid molecule that comprises the nucleic acid sequence which defines thecomponent polynucleotide. For example, where the componentpolynucleotide is a promoter, the source construct that “encodes” thiscomponent polynucleotide comprises the nucleotide sequence of thepromoter.

“Complementary” refers to the topological compatibility or matchingtogether of interacting surfaces of two polynucleotides as understood bythose of skill in the art. Thus, two sequences are “complementary” toone another if they are capable of hybridizing to one another to form astable anti-parallel, double-stranded nucleic acid structure. A firstpolynucleotide is complementary to a second polynucleotide if thenucleotide sequence of the first polynucleotide is substantiallyidentical to the nucleotide sequence of the polynucleotide bindingpartner of the second polynucleotide, or if the first polynucleotide canhybridize to the second polynucleotide under stringent hybridizationconditions. Thus, the polynucleotide whose sequence 5′-TATAC-3′ iscomplementary to a polynucleotide whose sequence is 5 ‘-GTATA-3’.

“Primer” refers to a polynucleotide sequence that is capable ofspecifically hybridizing to a polynucleotide template sequence, e.g., aprimer binding segment, and is capable of providing a point ofinitiation for synthesis of a complementary polynucleotide underconditions suitable for synthesis, i.e., in the presence of nucleotidesand an agent that catalyzes the synthesis reaction (e.g., a DNApolymerase). The primer is complementary to the polynucleotide templatesequence, but it need not be an exact complement of the polynucleotidetemplate sequence. For example, a primer can be at least about 80, 85,90, 95, 96, 97, 98, or 99% identical to the complement of thepolynucleotide template sequence. A primer can be of variable length butgenerally is at least 15 bases. In some embodiments, the primer isbetween 15 and 35 bases long. In some embodiments, the primer is morethan 35 bases long. In other embodiments, the primer has a meltingtemperature (T_(m)), i.e., the temperature at which one half of the DNAduplex will dissociate to become single stranded, of at least 50° C. Inother embodiments, the primer has a T_(m) between about 50° C. and 70°C. In still other embodiments, the primer does not form appreciable DNAor RNA secondary structures so as to not impact the efficiency ofhybridization to the polynucleotide template sequence.

As used herein, the term “primer binding segment” is a polynucleotidesequence that binds to a primer so as to provide a point of initiationfor synthesis of a complementary polynucleotide under conditionssuitable for synthesis. In some embodiments, the primer binding sequenceis one of the annealable linkers of the present invention. A sequence isa primer binding sequence instead of an annealable linker by the absenceof a complementary linker within a given set of assembly vectors orcomponent polynucleotides within an assembly composition. In someembodiments, the primer binding segment can function as a genomictargeting sequence, e.g., an upstream or downstream genomic targetingsequence.

As used herein, the term “linker nucleic acid sequence” and “annealablelinker sequence” are used interchangeably and refer to a polynucleotidesequence that flanks a DNA segment within an entry vector or assemblyvector. Upon excision of a component polynucleotide from an assemblyvector, and denaturation of the component polynucleotide, an annealablelinker is capable of specifically hybridizing to a complementaryannealable linker sequence of an adjacent component polynucleotide in apolynucleotide assembly reaction, as described herein. An annealablelinker, upon annealing with a complementary linker strand, can provide apoint of initiation for synthesis of a complementary polynucleotide.

As used herein, the term “vector” is used in reference toextrachromosomal nucleic acid molecules capable of replication in a celland to which an insert sequence can be operatively linked so as to bringabout replication of the insert sequence. Useful examples include butare not limited to circular DNA molecules such as plasmid constructs,phage constructs, cosmid vectors, etc., as well as linear nucleic acidconstructs (e.g., lambda phage constructs, bacterial artificialchromosomes (BACs), yeast artificial chromosomes (YACs), etc.). A vectormay include expression signals such as a promoter and/or a terminator, aselectable marker such as a gene conferring resistance to an antibiotic,and one or more restriction sites into which insert sequences can becloned. Vectors can have other unique features (such as the size of DNAinsert they can accommodate).

As used herein, the term “entry vector” refers to a cloning vectorplasmid that can serve as a parental vector for the preparation of anassembly vector to be used in the polynucleotide assembly methodsprovided herein. An entry vector comprises two annealable linkersequences, or an annealable linker sequence and a primer bindingsegment, which flank restriction sites that can be utilized for theintroduction of a DNA segment to form an assembly vector. As usedherein, an “assembly vector” refers to an entry vector to which a DNAsegment has been introduced. An assembly vector can be used in thepolynucleotide assembly methods described herein to provide a componentpolynucleotide to be assembled into a assembled polynucleotide.

As used herein, the term “assembly vector” refers to a vector comprisingone annealable linker sequence, two annealable linker sequences, or anannealable linker sequence and a primer binding segment, and a DNAsegment.

As used herein, the term “restriction enzyme” or “restrictionendonuclease” refers to a member or members of a classification ofcatalytic molecules that bind a cognate sequence of DNA and cleave theDNA molecule at a precise location within that sequence. Restrictionendonucleases include Type IIS restriction endonucleases. This class ofenzymes differs from other restriction endonucleases in that therecognition sequence is separate from the site of cleavage. Someexamples of Type IIS restriction enzymes include AlwI, BsaI, BbsI, BbuI,BsmAI, BsrI, BsmI, BspMI, Earl, Esp3I, FokI, HgaI, HphI, LguI, MboII,MnlI, PleI, SapI, SchI, SfaNi, and the like. Many of these restrictionendonucleases are available commercially and are well known to thoseskilled in the art.

As used herein, the term “genomic targeting sequence” refers to anucleotide sequence that is present in the genome of a host cell at asite at which a polynucleotide of the invention is to be inserted byhost cell mediated homologous recombination. The terms “upstream genomictargeting sequence” and “downstream genomic targeting sequence” refer togenomic targeting sequences that are located upstream and downstream ofeach other in the genome of a host cell. An example of a genomictargeting sequence is a locus.

As used herein, the term “chromosomal targeting sequence” refers to anucleotide sequence that is present in a chromosome of a host cell at asite at which a polynucleotide of the invention is to be inserted byhost cell mediated homologous recombination. The terms “upstreamchromosomal targeting sequence” and “downstream chromosomal targetingsequence” refer to chromosomal targeting sequences that are locatedupstream and downstream of each other in a chromosome of a host cell. Anexample of a genomic targeting sequence is a locus.

The term “codon substitution” refers to a process of altering apolynucleotide sequence by changing one or more of the codons encodingone or more amino acids within a polypeptide, though without alteringthe sequence of the encoded polypeptide.

5.2 Methods of Polynucleotide Assembly

In one aspect, the present disclosure provides rapid, robust, andhigh-throughput methods for the ordered assembly of a plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides into one or more assembled polynucleotides,also termed engineered nucleic acid constructs.

The systems, compositions and methods provided herein allow for rapidand ordered assembly, or “stitching,” of component polynucleotides intoassembled polynucleotides, termed engineered nucleic acid constructs.The disclosed systems, compositions and methods are particularlyadvantageous because they make use of available resources to reduce thecost of synthesizing new engineered nucleic acid constructs. Forinstance, if component polynucleotides that form part of a desiredengineered nucleic acid construct are already available in a freezerstore, an optimal combination of such component polynucleotides areselected and suitable primer pairs are calculated for the missingportions of the engineered nucleic acid construct, i.e., those notalready available in a freezer store. This minimizes the design of newprimer pairs and subcloning from a genomic library, or other nucleicacid source, that needs to be performed in order to synthesize thedesired engineered nucleic acid construct thereby increasing the speedat which such an engineered nucleic acid construct may be made while atthe same time reducing costs. Using the disclosed systems, compositionsand methods, a high throughput scheme for making engineered nucleic acidconstructs is realized.

Thus, in one aspect, provided herein is a user-friendly interface forthe computer-implemented design and assembly of nucleic acid constructs.The systems, compositions and methods provided herein enable a syntheticbiologist to engineer a desired nucleic acid construct to introduce intoa host cell genome. In particular, the systems and methods provide forassembly into a single assembled polynucleotide of a number offunctional DNA elements, including but not limited to protein-codingsequences, reporter genes, fluorescent marker coding sequences,promoters, enhancers, terminators, introns, exons, poly-A tails,multiple cloning sites, nuclear localization signals, mRNA stabilizationsignals, selectable markers, integration loci, epitope tag codingsequences, and degradation signals. The methods can be used for theassembly of any type of assembled polynucleotide, including but notlimited to synthetic genes, constructs, cloning vectors, expressionvectors, chromosomes, genomic integration constructs, genomes, and DNAlibraries. Furthermore, the methods can be used to assemble DNA segmentsin a single reaction without need for manipulation and characterizationof intermediate products.

In some embodiments, the methods include those disclosed in U.S. Pat.No. 8,110,360, which is hereby incorporated by reference in itsentirety. In some embodiments, the disclosed methods utilize circularnucleic acid vectors, termed assembly vectors, that each comprise a DNAsegment, D, flanked by an annealable linker sequence (e.g., LA or LB), apair of annealable linker sequences (e.g., LA and LB), or an annealablelinker sequence and a primer binding segment (e.g., LA and PB or LB andPA), and a pair of restriction sites, RA and RB (FIG. 9, where the sitesSap1 illustrates both RA and RB).

Restriction endonuclease digestion of a plurality of assembly vectors atrestriction sites RA and RB generates a plurality of componentpolynucleotides comprising the elements 5′-LA-D-3′, 5′-D-LB-3′,5′-LA-D-LB-3′, 5′-LA-D-PB-3′, or 5′-LB-D-PA-3′ (FIG. 10). In thedisclosed methods, annealable linker sequences LA and LB provide thecomponent polynucleotides with complementary termini that are utilizedin a splice overlap extension assembly reaction followed by polymerasechain reaction (SOE/PCR) to assemble the component polynucleotides intoan assembled polynucleotide with an ordered sequence.

In some embodiments, provided herein are methods of assembling aplurality of component polynucleotides into one or more assembledpolynucleotides, comprising the steps of:

-   -   (a) digesting an assembly composition with one or more        restriction endonucleases to generate a components composition,        the assembly composition comprising:        -   (i) one or more first nucleic acid molecules, wherein each            first nucleic acid molecule is circular and comprises, in a            5′ to 3′ orientation, a first restriction site RA₀, any            primer binding segment selected from the group PA, any DNA            segment selected from the group D₀, an annealable linker            sequence LB₀, and a second restriction site RB₀;        -   (ii) one or more intermediate nucleic acid molecules wherein            each intermediate nucleic acid molecule n is circular and            comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a first restriction            site RA_(n), a first annealable linker sequence LA_(n), any            DNA segment selected from the group D_(n), a second            annealable linker sequence LB_(n), and a second restriction            site RB_(n), and wherein n represents an integer from one to            the number of intermediate nucleic acid molecules; and        -   (iii) one or more last nucleic acid molecules, wherein each            last nucleic acid molecule is circular and comprises, in a            5′ to 3′ orientation, a first restriction site RA_(m), an            annealable linker sequence LA_(m), a DNA segment selected            from the group D_(m), any primer binding segment selected            from the group PB, a second restriction site RB_(m) wherein            m represents an integer one greater than the number of            intermediate nucleic acid molecules; whereupon cleavage of            restriction sites RA₀ through RB_(m) and denaturation of the            resulting linear nucleic acid molecules, each annealable            linker sequence LB_((p-1)) is capable of hybridizing to the            complement of annealable linker sequence LA_(p), wherein n            is an integer that varies from 1 to (m−1), wherein p            represents an integer from 1 to m, and wherein each group            D₀, . . . D_(n), . . . and D_(m) consists of one or more DNA            segments;    -   wherein the one or more restriction endonucleases are capable of        cleaving the restriction sites RA₀ through RB_(m); and    -   (b) contacting the components composition with DNA polymerase,        deoxyribonucleoside triphosphates and one or more first primers        and one or more second primers, under conditions suitable for        denaturation of the nucleic acid molecules, annealing of        annealable linker sequence LB_((p-1)) to annealable linker        sequence LA_(p), and extension therefrom; wherein each said        first primer is capable of hybridizing to one of said primer        binding segments selected from the group PA and each said second        primer is capable of hybridizing to one of said primer binding        segments selected from the group PB; and subjecting the        components composition to polymerase chain reaction,        where a polynucleotide is assembled which comprises, in a 5′ to        3′ orientation, one DNA segment selected from each of the groups        D₀, . . . D_(n), . . . and D_(m). In the method, p represents        the integers from 1 to m.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 11, the assembly composition fromwhich the assembled polynucleotide is generated comprises four inputassembly vectors, denoted “first,” “intermediate 1 (int₁),”“intermediate 2 (int₂),” and “last.” Each assembly vector comprises aDNA segment flanked either by an annealable linker sequence and a primerbinding segment, or by two annealable linker sequences. Specifically,DNA segment D₀ is flanked by 5′ primer binding segment PA and 3′annealable linker sequence LB₀. DNA segment D₁ is flanked by 5′ and 3′annealable linker sequences LA₁ and LB₁, and DNA segment D₂ is flankedby 5′ and 3′ annealable linker sequences LA₂ and LB₂. DNA segment D₃ isflanked by 3′ primer binding segment PB and 5′ annealable linkersequence LA₃. The 5′-PA-D-LB-3′,5′-LA-D-LB-3′, or 5′-LA-D-PB-3′ elementsin the assembly vectors are further flanked by SapI restrictionendonuclease sites.

In the first step of the assembly reaction shown in FIG. 11, theassembly composition is digested with SapI, resulting in the excision ofcomponent polynucleotides, comprising the elements 5′-PA-D-LB-3′,5′LA-D-LB-3′, or 5′-LA-D-PB-3′, from the assembly vector backbones intoa components composition. Because Sap I is a Type IIS restrictionendonuclease, its recognition site is distal to its cleavage site, andcleavage occurs outside of its recognition sequence. This property makesType IIS restriction endonucleases particularly useful in the assemblyof a polynucleotide according to the methods provided herein, sincepolynucleotides can be assembled which do not comprise arestriction-site scar, which may otherwise result from cleavage ofrestriction sites RA and RB with a non-TypeIIS restriction endonuclease.Referring to FIG. 10, the Type IIS recognition site is 5′ of thecorresponding cleavage site for each of RA₀, RA_(n), and RA_(m), and 3′of its cleavage site RB₀, RA_(n), and RA_(m). Thus, restriction sitesRA₀ through RB_(m) are oriented so that cleavage by one or more Type IISrestriction endonucleases capable of cleaving RA₀ through RB_(m) resultsin separation of RA₀ from D₀, LB₀ from RB₀, RA_(n), from LA_(n), LB_(n)from RB_(n), RA_(m) from LA_(m), and D_(m) from RB_(m), whereinresultant linearized nucleic acid molecules comprising D₀, LB₀, RA_(n),LB_(n), LA_(m) or D_(m) do not comprise any of RA₀ through RB_(m). As aconsequence, the resulting component polynucleotides do not include anytrace of either the restriction enzyme's recognition or cleavage sites.As a result, the inventive methods of polynucleotide assembly can beused to transform host cells multiple times without the introduction ofsequence repeats which may cause genetic instability.

Subsequently, the restriction endonuclease is optionally inactivated. Ifinactivation is desired, any method known in the art for inactivatingendonuclease enzyme activity may be employed, including column orgel-based purification methods. One convenient method is heatinactivation, e.g., at 65° for 20 minutes, which requires little or nomanipulation of the components composition outside of the reaction tube.

Assembly of the component polynucleotides into an assembledpolynucleotide is enabled by sequence duplexes formed by overlappingstrands of complementary termini among the component polynucleotides.Specifically, the annealable linker sequences are designed such thatannealable linker sequence LB₀ can hybridize to the complement ofannealable linker sequence LA₁, annealable linker sequence LB₁ canhybridize to the complement of annealable linker sequence LA₂, andannealable linker sequence LB₂ can hybridize to the complement ofannealable linker sequence LA₃. Thus, in the second step of the assemblyreaction, the component polynucleotides are subjected to denaturingconditions (e.g., heat) to generate single-stranded componentpolynucleotides, which concomitant with or subsequent to thedenaturation step of the assembly reaction are contacted with athermostable DNA polymerase and deoxyribonucleoside triphosphates.

The thermostable DNA polymerase can be any thermostable DNA polymerasedeemed suitable by those of skill in the art. Thermostable DNApolymerases suitable for use in the present methods include but are notlimited to Thermus thermophilus (Tth) DNA polymerase, Thermus aquaticus(Taq) DNA polymerase, Thermotoga neopolitana (Tne) DNA polymerase,Thermotoga maritima (Tma) DNA polymerase, Thermococcus litoralis (Tli orVENT™) DNA polymerase, Pyrococcus furiosus (Pfu or DEEPVENT™) DNApolymerase, Pyrococcus woosii (Pwo) DNA polymerase, Bacillussterothermophilus (Bst) DNA polymerase, Sulfolobus acidocaldarius (SAC)DNA polymerase, Thermoplasma acidophilum (Tac) DNA polymerase, Thermusflavus (Tfl/Tub) DNA polymerase, Thermus ruber (Tru) DNA polymerase,Thermus brockianus (DYNAZYME™) DNA polymerase, Methanobacteriumthermoautotrophicum (Mth) DNA polymerase, and mutants, variants, andderivatives thereof. Thermostable DNA polymerases having high fidelity(e.g., proofreading properties) and low error rates are preferred. Incertain embodiments, the DNA polymerase is PHUSION™ DNA Polymerase (NewEngland Biolabs, Ipswich, Mass.). In other embodiments, the DNAPolymerase is PFUULTRA™II Fusion DNA Polymerase (Strategene/Agilent, LaJolla, Calif.).

The assembly reaction is then subjected to conditions that allow forstrand elongation from the 3′-hydroxyl portions of the overlappingannealable linker sequences, during which the thermostable DNApolymerase fills in the portion between the overlapping annealablelinker sequences. The assembly reaction is subjected to a limited numberof repeating cycles of denaturation/annealing/extension (e.g., for 5-15cycles) during which a substantial amount of double-stranded assembledpolynucleotides are formed. During this cycling, the componentpolynucleotides act as both primers and template to generate a fulllength template for the assembled polynucleotide. In certainembodiments, the annealing and extension steps of the PCR can both beperformed at 72° C.

In contrast to the annealable linker sequences LA and LB, the primerbinding segments PA and PB are designed to not overlap with each otheror any of the annealable linker sequences or DNA segments, but ratherserve as binding sites for primers used to amplify the full lengthassembled polynucleotide. Thus, in steps 4 and 5 of the assemblyreaction, primers complementary to primer binding segments PA and PB areadded, and the composition is subjected to traditional PCR amplificationconditions. The PCR amplification conditions can be any PCRamplification conditions deemed suitable by those of skill in the art,including those described in PCR Technology: Principles and Applicationsfor DNA Amplification, ed. HA Erlich, Stockton Press, New York, N.Y.(1989); PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications, eds. Innis,Gelfland, Snisky, and White, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif. (1990);Mattila et al. (1991) Nucleic Acids Res. 19: 4967; Eckert, K. A. andKunkel, T. A. (1991) PCR Methods and Applications 1: 17; and U.S. Pat.Nos. 4,683,202 and 4,965,188, each of which are incorporated herein byreference. In certain embodiments, the PCR step of the assembly reactioncomprises about 35 cycles of denaturation, annealing, and extension inthe presence of primers complementary to primer binding segments PA andPB. In certain embodiments, the annealing and extension steps of the PCRcan both be performed at 72°. However, one of skill in the art willunderstand that optimal conditions for successful amplification willdepend on the thermostable DNA polymerase and the annealable linkersequences utilized, and these conditions may be adjusted accordingly.

Optionally, the assembled polynucleotide can be purified by anytechnique apparent to one of skill in the art, e.g., gel electrophoresispurification methods and used for a variety of purposes. For example,the assembled polynucleotide can be inserted into an expression vectorbackbone for sequence verification.

In other embodiments, the systems and methods also provide for theassembly of an assembled polynucleotide from a plurality of componentpolynucleotides not originating from a circular assembly vector. Forexample, linear polynucleotides, including DNA segments obtained bystandard procedures known in the art, such as for example, PCRamplification, chemical synthesis, and the like, can be assembled usingthe aforementioned methods of assembly. In some embodiments, the linearpolynucleotides comprise nucleic acid sequences that encode genes orgenetic elements of interest (e.g., promoters, terminators, selectablemarkers, integration loci, epitope tags, localization signals,degradation signals, fluorescent markers, multiple cloning sites). Insome embodiments, these nucleic acid sequences are flanked by one or twoannealable linker sequences, LA and/or LB, or by an annealable linkersequence and a primer binding segment (e.g., LA and PB or LB and PA).

In some embodiments, the linear polynucleotides may be added to theassembly reaction at any stage prior to the SOE/PCR reaction or hostcell mediated homologous recombination for assembly into the assembledpolynucleotide. Thus, in some embodiments, the assembly methods can beused to assemble: (1) linear component polynucleotides derived fromassembly vectors comprising one or two annealable linker sequences, oran annealable linker sequence and a primer binding segment, andgenerated by digestion of the assembly vectors; (2) vectorless linearDNA fragments flanked by one or two annealable linker sequences, or byan annealable linker sequence and a primer binding segment; and (3)combinations thereof.

Accordingly, in some embodiments, provided herein are methods ofassembling a plurality of component polynucleotides into one or moreassembled polynucleotides, comprising the steps of:

-   -   (a) providing a components composition comprising:        -   (i) one or more first nucleic acid molecules, wherein each            first nucleic acid molecule is linear and comprises, in a 5′            to 3′ orientation, any primer binding segment selected from            the group PA, any DNA segment selected from the group D₀,            and an annealable linker sequence LB₀;        -   (ii) one or more intermediate nucleic acid molecules wherein            each intermediate nucleic acid molecule n is linear and            comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a first annealable            linker sequence LA_(n), any DNA segment selected from the            group D_(n), and a second annealable linker sequence LB_(n),            wherein n represents an integer from one to the number of            intermediate nucleic acid molecules; and        -   (iii) one or more last nucleic acid molecules, wherein each            last nucleic acid molecule is linear and comprises, in a 5′            to 3′ orientation, an annealable linker sequence LA_(m), a            DNA segment selected from the group D_(m), and any primer            binding segment selected from the group PB, wherein m            represents an integer one greater than the number of            intermediate nucleic acid molecules; whereupon denaturation            of the resulting linear nucleic acid molecules, each            annealable linker sequence LB_((p-1)) is capable of            hybridizing to the complement of annealable linker sequence            LA_(p), wherein n is an integer that varies from 1 to (m−1),            wherein p represents an integer from 1 to m, and wherein            each group D₀, . . . D_(m) . . . and D_(m) consists of one            or more DNA segments; and    -   (b) contacting the components composition with DNA polymerase,        deoxyribonucleoside triphosphates and one or more first primers        and one or more second primers, under conditions suitable for        denaturation of the nucleic acid molecules, annealing of        annealable linker sequence LB_((p-1)) to annealable linker        sequence LA_(p), and extension therefrom; wherein each said        first primer is capable of hybridizing to one of said primer        binding segments selected from the group PA and each said second        primer is capable of hybridizing to one of said primer binding        segments selected from the group PB; and subjecting the        components composition to polymerase chain reaction,        where a polynucleotide is assembled which comprises, in a 5′ to        3′ orientation, one DNA segment selected from each of the groups        D₀, . . . D_(n), . . . and D_(m). In the method, p represents        the integers from 1 to m.

In other embodiments, the methods of polynucleotide assembly providedherein comprise transforming a host cell with a plurality of linearpolynucleotides, for example polynucleotides generated by standardprocedures known in the art, such as PCR amplification, chemicalsynthesis, and the like, or by the methods of polynucleotide assemblydescribed herein, and allowing the host cell to generate one or moreassembled polynucleotides in vivo by homologous recombination. In aparticular embodiment, the host cell combines the plurality of linearpolynucleotides into a single combined polynucleotide by homologousrecombination. Host cell transformants comprising the combinedpolynucleotides are selected by virtue of expressing a selectable markerthat is generated in the process of combining the linearpolynucleotides.

In some embodiments, one or more linear polynucleotides to be assembledin vivo comprises an annealable linker sequence LB that is homologous toan annealable linker sequence LA of another linear polynucleotide to beassembled, and that is of sufficient length to initiate host mediatedhomologous recombination. The host cell recombines the componentpolynucleotides at the regions of homology between the annealable linkersequences to form an assembled polynucleotide. Host cells comprising theassembled polynucleotide can be readily identified based on a selectablemarker encoded by a DNA segment of the assembled polynucleotide. In someembodiments, the assembled polynucleotide comprises an upstreamchromosomal targeting sequence and a downstream chromosomal targetingsequence, wherein both chromosomal targeting sequences are of sufficientlength to initiate host mediated homologous recombination of theassembled polynucleotide with a target loci on a chromosome of the hostcell.

The method is particularly useful for inserting relatively large piecesof polynucleotide into a target polynucleotide by homologousrecombination. For chromosomal integration to occur, the combinedpolynucleotide must comprise an upstream genomic targeting sequencelocated 5′ or 3′ of the DNA segment and a downstream genomic targetingsequence located 3′ or 5′ of the coding sequence of the DNA segment,respectively. Genomic integration as used herein includes chromosomalintegration, i.e., integration of a polynucleotide into a chromosome ofa host cell. Suitable chromosomal integration sites in Saccharomycescerevisiae include but are not limited to the NDT80, HO, GAL2, andGAL1-GAL 10-GAL7 locus. The method can also be useful for generatinghost cells comprising an extrachromosomally maintained polynucleotide,e.g., vectors and expression plasmids. The stability of either achromosomally integrated or an extrachromosomally maintained combinedpolynucleotide is increased when the combined polynucleotide does notcomprise identical annealable linker sequences or DNA segments arrangedas direct repeats that can otherwise initiate additional homologousrecombination events resulting in the excision of segments of thecomponent polynucleotide. Therefore, in some embodiments, the assembledpolynucleotides comprise unique annealable linker sequences and DNAsegments. In other embodiments, the assembled polynucleotides containone or more identical annealable linker sequences or DNA segments thatupon combination of the assembled polynucleotides are arranged asinverted repeats in the combined polynucleotide.

In other embodiments, the systems, compositions and methods providedherein also provide for the assembly of the component polynucleotidesinto an assembled polynucleotide via chain reaction cloning using athermostable ligase, as described for example, in U.S. Pat. No.6,143,527, and Pachuk et al., Gene 243:19-25 (2000), each of which ishereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

In brief, chain reaction cloning utilizes the specificity ofWatson-Crick base pairing and the amplification capability ofthermostable DNA ligases such as Ampligase° (Epicentre Technologies,Madison, Wis.). The method involves the use of two or moreoligonucleotides called “bridge oligonucleotides.” Each bridgeoligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to the ends of two DNAmolecules to be ligated. The oligonucleotides overlap the ligationjunction, for example, by approximately 10-40 bases on each side, andensure that the two single-stranded nucleic acid molecules are alignedcorrectly. Individual double-stranded nucleic acid molecules to beligated can include, for example, component polynucleotides flanked byone or two full or partial annealable linker sequences, LA and/or LB, orby a full or partial annealable linker sequence and a full or partialprimer binding segment (e.g., LA and PB or LB and PA). When utilizingchain reaction cloning as a method of polynucleotide assembly,complementarity between LA and LB is not required, and in certainembodiments, such complementarity is avoided so as to reduce competitionfor hybridization of the annealable linker or primer binding segment tothe appropriate bridging oligonucleotides. The DNA molecules to beligated are incubated with the bridge oligonucleotides and athermostable DNA ligase, and heated, for example, to 94° C. to denaturethe double-stranded DNA. The sample is then cooled to a temperature thatenables each bridge oligonucleotide to anneal to its two components inthe single-stranded DNA molecules. The bridge oligonucleotide acts tobring the two single-stranded DNA termini into close proximity, wherethey can become a substrate for ligation. The DNA ligase joins the twonucleic acid molecules into a single, larger, composite nucleic acidmolecule. To avoid non-specific annealing of oligonucleotides, theannealing temperature is not dropped below the melting temperature(T_(m)) of the oligonucleotides. In some embodiments, all of theoligonucleotides in a reaction are designed to have a similar T_(m). Thetemperature is then brought up to 66° C., the optimal temperature forAmpligase®. The nucleic acid molecules are subsequently denatured sothat the composite molecule formed by the ligated nucleic acid moleculesand the template cease to hybridize to each. Each composite moleculethen serves as a template for orienting unligated, single-strandednucleic acid molecules. In subsequent cycles of the reaction, both thebridge oligonucleotide and product molecules act as templates forhybridization and ligation. After several cycles, composite nucleic acidmolecules are generated from smaller nucleic acid molecules.

5.3 Exemplary System for Polynucleotide Assembly

The systems and methods described in Section 5.2 provide for theadvantageous construction of engineered nucleic acid constructs.Detailed in this section are advantageous systems for obtaining each ofthe component polynucleotides necessary to construct such engineerednucleic acid constructs. The disclosed systems are particularlyadvantageous because they make use of existing component polynucleotidesbound to linker nucleic acid sequences in an available freezer storewhen such existing component polynucleotides are available. Thedisclosed systems will rearrange the component polynucleotides, insilico, in order to discover a contiguous arrangement of componentpolynucleotides that will carry out the nucleic acid requests associatedwith an engineered nucleic acid construct, and the concomitant choice oflinker nucleic acid sequences that the arrangement dictates, utilizingcomponent polynucleotides available in the freezer store. Primers forthe missing component polynucleotides, i.e., those not available in afreezer store, and their concomitant linker nucleic acid sequences, arethen designed for synthesis. In this way, all the componentpolynucleotides, including the appropriate linker nucleic acid sequenceslinked to such component polynucleotides are prepared in the mosteconomical fashion by exploiting the resources of the available freezerstore. The component polynucleotides bound to linkers in the freezerstore that match the component polynucleotides bound to linkers in thearrangement are retrieved from the freezer store while the missingcomponent polynucleotides and their linkers are synthesized using thecalculated primer pairs.

FIG. 1 details just such an exemplary system 11 for use in defining anengineered nucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus Lof a target organism or a host cell. It will be appreciated that system11 may be a scientific apparatus or a general purpose computer system.The system preferably comprises a computer system 10 having:

-   -   a central processing unit 22;    -   a main non-volatile (non-transitory) storage unit 14, for        example a hard disk drive, for storing software and data, the        storage unit 14 controlled by storage controller 12;    -   a system memory 36, preferably high speed random-access memory        (RAM), for storing system control programs, data, and        application programs, comprising programs and data loaded from        non-volatile storage unit 14; system memory 36 may also include        read-only memory (ROM);    -   a user interface 32, comprising one or more input devices (e.g.,        keyboard 28, a mouse) and a display 26 or other output device;    -   optionally, a network interface card 20 (communications        circuitry) for connecting to any wired or wireless communication        network 34 (e.g., a wide area network such as the Internet);    -   a power source 24 to power the aforementioned elements; and    -   an internal bus 30 for interconnecting the aforementioned        elements of the system.

Operation of computer 10 is controlled primarily by operating system 40,which is executed by central processing unit 22. Operating system 40 canbe stored in system memory 36. In a typical implementation, systemmemory 36 also includes:

-   -   a file system 42 for controlling access to the various files and        data structures;    -   an identification of a target organism or a host cell 44 into        which an engineered nucleic acid construct will be integrated;    -   an engineered nucleic acid assembly module 46 for assembling one        or more engineered nucleic acid constructs in accordance with        the present disclosure;    -   the sequences of one or more engineered nucleic constructs 48        that have been constructed by engineered nucleic acid assembly        module 46 in accordance with the present disclosure;    -   a freezer store database 62 that details the source constructs        that are physically present in a corresponding freezer store;    -   a library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64 that are available        for linking component nucleotides in accordance with an        embodiment of the present disclosure;    -   an arrangement scoring module 66 for scoring an arrangement of        component nucleotides in accordance with the present disclosure;        and    -   a primer pair calculation module 68 for computing primer pairs        in accordance with the present disclosure.

As illustrated in FIG. 1, computer 10 comprises data such as engineerednucleic acid constructs 48 as well as associated data for suchconstructs 48 (e.g., nucleic acid request 50, component polynucleotidesequences 52, scores for contiguous arrangements 56, identity ofphysically present constructs 58, and identity of primer pairs 60),freezer store database 62, and library of linker nucleic acid sequences64. Such data can be stored in any form of data storage systemincluding, but not limited to, a flat file, a relational database (SQL),or an on-line analytical processing (OLAP) database (MDX and/or variantsthereof). In some embodiments, engineered nucleic acid constructs 48 aswell as associated data for such constructs 48, freezer store database62, and library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64 is stored in asingle database. In other embodiments, engineered nucleic acidconstructs 48 as well as associated data for such constructs 48, freezerstore database 62, and library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64 infact are stored in a plurality of databases that may or may not all behosted by the same computer 10. In such embodiments, some components ofengineered nucleic acid constructs 48 as well as associated data forsuch constructs 48, freezer store database 62, and library of linkernucleic acid sequences 64 are stored on computer systems that are notillustrated by FIG. 1 but that are addressable by wide area network 34.

In some embodiments, computer 10 calculates engineered nucleic acidconstructs 48 for at least two engineered nucleic acid constructs 48, atleast three engineered nucleic acid constructs 48, at least fourengineered nucleic acid constructs 48, at least five engineered nucleicacid constructs 48, at least fifteen engineered nucleic acid constructs48, or at least fifty engineered nucleic acid constructs 48. In someembodiments, freezer store database 62 includes at least 2, at least 5,at least 8, at least 10, at least twenty-five, at least fifty, at leastone hundred, at least two hundred, at least one thousand, at least fivethousand, at least twenty-five thousand or at least 50 thousanddifferent source constructs.

In some embodiments, engineered nucleic acid constructs 48 as well asassociated data for such constructs 48, freezer store database 62, andlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences 64 and related software modulesillustrated in FIG. 1 (e.g. engineered nucleic acid assembly module 46,arrangement scoring module 6, and primer pair calculation module 68) areon a single computer (e.g., computer 10) and in other embodiments theyare hosted by several computers (not shown). In fact, all possiblearrangements of engineered nucleic acid constructs 48 as well asassociated data for such constructs 48, freezer store database 62, andlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences 64 and the modules illustratedin FIG. 1 on one or more computers are within the scope of the presentdisclosure so long as these components are addressable with respect toeach other across computer network 34 or by other electronic means.Thus, the present disclosure fully encompasses a broad array of computersystems.

5.4 Exemplary Method for Polynucleotide Assembly Multiple Arrangements

Methods for polynucleotide assembly are provided. Like the systems ofSection 5.3, the methods disclosed in this section allow for theefficient construction of engineered nucleic acid constructs using theresources of a freezer store. More specifically, referring to FIG. 2, amethod for defining an engineered nucleic acid construct for integrationinto a genomic locus L of a target organism or a host cell is disclosed.Exemplary target organisms include, but are not limited to, yeast, E.coli, or baculovirus.

Certain of the steps are performed by various modules in memory 36. Forexample, in one embodiment, all the steps disclosed in FIG. 2 aredirected by an engineered nucleic acid assembly module 46, with specificinput for step 208 from an arrangement scoring module 66 and specificinput for step 214 from a primer pair calculation module 68. However, itwill be appreciated that the steps described in FIG. 2 can be encoded ina single module or any combination of modules.

Step 202.

In step 202, a plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR1, . . . , NR_(n)}are received, where n is a positive integer greater than 1. Each nucleicacid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifies a genetic changeto locus L of a target organism or a host cell. In some embodiments,engineered nucleic acid assembly module 46 provides an input screen,such as input screen 302 for the input of {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}.Examples of {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} are illustrated in FIG. 3. Forexample, the {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} “HÔ::pSLN1>SKN7” for the targetorganism yeast specifies the insertion of an exogenous copy of SKN7under the SLN1 promoter at the yeast HO locus.

Similarly, the {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} “GAL2̂::pTDH3>STE14” for the targetorganism yeast specifies the insertion of an exogenous copy of STE14under the pTDH3 promoter at the GAL2 locus and the {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}“GAL2̂::pTDH3>ACE2” for the target organism yeast specifies the insertionof an exogenous copy of ACE2 under the pTDH3 promoter at the GAL2 locus.

The plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} may placemore than one component polynucleotide at a locus. This is denotedherein by “::” to separate the elements. For example,“HÔ::pSLN1>ADH1::pFBA1>ADH2” specifies that two different genes, ADH1and ADH2, are placed at the HO locus under different promoters. In someembodiments, {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifies one or more genetic changesto locus L, two or more genetic changes to locus L, three or moregenetic changes to locus L, four or more genetic changes to locus L,five or more genetic changes to locus L, between 5 and 10 geneticchanges to locus L, between 5 and 40 changes to locus L, or more than 40changes to locus L. In some embodiments, {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifiesbetween 2 and 12 nucleic acid requests (change to locus L), between 2and 100 nucleic acid requests, or more than 20 nucleic acid requests.However, regardless of the number of changes to locus L (nucleic acidrequests) in {NR1, . . . , NR_(n)}, in typical embodiments, only onelocus L is specified by the plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR₁, . .. , NR_(n)}. That is, the genetic changes are directed to only one locusin the genome of the target organism. Multiple deletions, insertions,and other genetic changes disclosed herein can be requested at this onelocus L, but only one locus is specified. This is because the end resultof the exemplary methods provided herein are one or more engineerednucleic acid constructs that, in preferred embodiments, includeinsertion sequences for recombining with the target locus by homologousrecombination.

A nucleic acid request NR_(i) may specify an amino acid substitution.For instance, gGPR1$A640C specifies the GPR1 gene with an amino acidsubstitution at position 640 from alanine (A) to cysteine (C). A nucleicacid request NR_(i) may specify a nucleic acid substitution. Forexample, gADH1*A200G specifies a point mutation at base pair 200 in theopen reading frame, numbered from one, from an adenosine to a guanine Anucleic acid request NR_(i) may specify a slice of a desired gene part.This is denoted herein as “[ ]”. The slice follows the gene namespecification and specifies a “from” and “to” coordinate separated by acolon. For example gYNG2[1:660] requests the first 660 bases of the openreading frame of the YNG2 gene.

For convenience, a coordinate may be specified relative to the first orlast base of the open reading frame. By default, everything is relativeto the first base, but an ‘S’ or ‘E’ can be used to explicitly requestand coordinate relative to the particular start or end. Relative to thestart −1 is the first base preceding the open reading frame and negativecoordinates in general specify upstream locations. Positive coordinatesare downstream of the first base. Relative to the end, negativecoordinates are upstream of the final base in the open reading frame(e.g. in the open reading frame and positive coordinates are downstreamor in the three prime UTR). For example, gADH1[1:−4E] specifies the openreading frame of ADH1 omitting the final stop codon. gADH1[1E:200E]specifies the downstream 200 base pairs of the ADH1 gene, (e.g. itsterminator sequence). gADH1[−500:−1] or gADH1[−500S:−1S] specify thepromoter sequence.

For many designs, the precise end of a slice is less important thanfinding a point that will result in reliable construction, and so acoordinate may be preceded with a to indicate an approximate preference.For example gADH1[˜−500:−1] takes approximately 500 bases upstream ofthe ADH1 gene and the final decision for what constitutes the requestNR_(i) is based on an optimal construction decision e.g. avoiding lowcomplexity DNA sequence.

The notation “!” can be used generally with any part to indicate that itshould be inverted relative to its naturally occurring (locus)orientation. For example, the expression !gADH1; pGAL1; gADH2 specifiesthat the bidirectional gall yeast promoter is used to drive two genesone of which must point in the reverse direction relative to the otherand the promoter.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request in the plurality of nucleicacid requests specifies insertion of an insertion sequence at L. In somesuch embodiments, the insertion sequence comprises a promoter and a genethe expression of which is driven by the promoter. In some suchembodiments, the insertion sequence comprises a divergent promoter and afirst gene and a second gene driven by the divergent promoter. In someembodiments, the divergent promoter is a back-to-back divergentpromoter, an overlapping divergent promoter, or a face-to-face divergentpromoter. In some embodiments, the insertion sequence comprises apromoter, a gene, a terminator, an open reading frame, a codonsubstitution, a nucleic acid substitution, a point mutation, aninsertion mutation, or a deletion mutation. In some embodiments, theinsertion sequence comprises a fusable open reading frame without a stopcodon.

In some embodiments, the insertion sequence specifies a protein-codingsequence, a reporter gene, a fluorescent marker coding sequence, apromoter, an enhancer, a terminator, an intron, an exon, a poly-A tail,multiple cloning sites, a nuclear localization signal, an mRNAstabilization signal, a selectable marker, an integration loci, anepitope tag coding sequence, or a degradation signal. In someembodiments, the insertion sequence specifies a DNA segment of naturalorigin. Alternatively, the insertion sequence specifies a DNA segmentthat can be completely of synthetic origin, produced in vitro.Furthermore, an insertion sequence can comprise any combination ofisolated naturally occurring DNA molecules, or any combination of anisolated naturally occurring DNA molecule and a synthetic DNA molecule.For example, an insertion sequence may comprise a heterologous promoteroperably linked to a protein coding sequence, a protein coding sequencelinked to a poly-A tail, a protein coding sequence linked in-frame witha epitope tag coding sequence, and the like.

In some embodiments, the nucleic acid request specifies that the entiregenomic locus L is to be replaced by the insertion sequence. In somesuch embodiments, the nucleic acid request specifies that a promoter anda gene at L is to be replaced by the insertion sequence. In some suchembodiments, the nucleic acid request specifies that a divergentpromoter and a first gene and a second gene driven by the divergentpromoter at L is to be replaced by the insertion sequence. In some suchembodiments, the divergent promoter is a back-to-back divergentpromoter, an overlapping divergent promoter, or a face-to-face divergentpromoter. In some such embodiments, the nucleic acid request specifiesthat a promoter, a gene, a terminator, an open reading frame, a codonsubstitution, a nucleic acid substitution, a point mutation, aninsertion mutation, or a deletion mutation at L is to be replaced by theinsertion sequence. In some embodiments the nucleic acid requestspecifies that a fusible open reading frame without a stop codon is tobe replaced by the insertion sequence. In some embodiments, theinsertion sequence includes a first copy of a gene in a 3′ to 5′orientation and a second copy of the gene in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, anda bi-directional promoter between the first copy and the second copy.

FIG. 3 illustrates that, in some embodiments, the plurality of nucleicacid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} is in a data input construct. Insome embodiments, the data input construct further comprises one or morepragmas to be used in performing the disclosed methods. In someembodiments, a pragma in the one or more pragmas specifies the identityof a predetermined library 64 of linker nucleic acid sequences that isto be used in the assembly of an engineered nucleic acid construct. Insome embodiments, a pragma in the one or more pragmas specifies whetherthe engineered nucleic acid construct is to be (i) a single constructor, (ii) a two part construct comprising a first PCR product having afirst part of a selectable marker and a second PCR product, having asecond part of the selectable marker, wherein the first PCR product,running in the 5′ to 3′ direction, combines with the second PCR product,running in the 3′ to 5′ direction, to form the engineered nucleic acidconstruct with the selectable marker. In some embodiments, a pragma inthe one or more pragmas specifies a selectable marker having a nucleicacid sequence to be incorporated into each contiguous arrangement AR_(i)generated by the methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments, a pragmais between a first nucleic acid request and a second nucleic acidrequest in the data input construct, and the pragma specifies that alinker nucleic acid sequence not be placed between a first componentpolynucleotide specified by the first nucleic acid request and a secondcomponent polynucleotide specified by the second nucleic acid request ineach contiguous arrangement AR_(i) generated by the methods disclosedherein. Such a pragma is useful instances where, for example, no nucleicacid linker is desired between a promoter and the gene the promoter isintended to express. Thus, in one example, the first componentpolynucleotide comprises a promoter and the second componentpolynucleotide comprises a gene. In some embodiments, a pragma in theone or more pragmas specifies a reference genome to be used duringexpansion step 204, described below, to generate the correspondingcomponent polynucleotide for a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)}.

In some embodiments, an identity of a selectable marker is received with{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}. This selectable marker is included in theengineered nucleic acid construct for purposes of validating successfulintegration of the engineered nucleic acid construct into the genome ofthe target organism or host cell. In some embodiments, a defaultselectable marker is used when no selectable marker is explicitlyincluded in the received request that includes {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}. Insome embodiments, an identity of a selectable marker is determinedwithout human intervention from a predetermined list of selectablemarkers when no selectable marker is explicitly included in the receivedrequest that includes {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}. In some embodiments, wherethe received request does not include a selectable marker, theselectable marker is identified using any of the above-identifiedtechniques during step 206 below.

Step 204.

In step 204, each NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} is expanded into acorresponding component polynucleotide, thereby forming a plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides. Expansion is necessary, for example, ininstances where a ˜ was used in an NR_(i) to indicate an approximatepreference. For example gADH1[˜−500:−1] takes approximately 500 basesupstream of the ADH1 gene and the final decision for what constitutesthe request NR_(i) is based on an optimal construction decision, e.g.avoiding low complexity DNA sequence. In step 204, such decisions aremade as part of the expansion of the NR_(i) to an actual polynucleotidesequence.

To illustrate expansion, consider the case of the plurality of nucleicacid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}: “HÔ::pSLN1>ADH1::pFBA1>ADH2” forthe target organism yeast. Here, expansion step 204 expands theplurality of nucleic acid requests into component polynucleotides thatallow for homologous recombination of pSLN1>ADH1::pFBA1>ADH2 into the HOlocus. Thus, in this example, expansion step 204 expands HÔ intoupstream and downstream integration sequences for homologousrecombination with HO, pSLN1 into a component polynucleotide thatencodes pSLN1, ADH1 into a component polynucleotide that encodes ADH1,pFBA1 into a component polynucleotide that encodes pFBA1, and ADH2 intoa component polynucleotide that encodes ADH2.

In some embodiments, step 204 comprises expanding a first nucleic acidrequest in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into a first component polynucleotideand a second component polynucleotide, where the first componentpolynucleotide is a promoter and the second component polynucleotide isa gene. In various embodiments, the expansion from nucleic acid requestin {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} to component polynucleotide is a one-to-oneexpansion, one-to-many expansion, or a many-to-one expansion. An exampleof a one-to-one expansion is the expansion of one nucleic acid requestinto a single corresponding component polynucleotide. An example of aone-to-many expansion is the breakdown of a single nucleic acid requestinto two or more component polynucleotides. An example of a many-to-oneexpansion is the taking one or more nucleic acid requests and encodingthe requests in a single component polynucleotide.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifies a point mutation in a gene at genomic locus L and theexpansion of this nucleic acid request in step 204 comprises obtaining anucleic acid sequence of the gene and modifying the nucleic acidsequence of the gene to form a component polynucleotide in the pluralityof component polynucleotides for {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifies that an exogenous gene is to be inserted at L and theexpansion of this nucleic acid request comprises obtaining a sequence ofthe exogenous gene from a database of nucleic acid sequences to form acomponent polynucleotide in the plurality of component polynucleotidesfor {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request references a gene that is tobe mutated, deleted from, or integrated in L and the expansion of step204 comprises validating that the gene exists in an electronic genedatabase. In some embodiments, the expansion of step 204 comprisesobtaining a nucleic acid segment specified by a nucleic acid requestNR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} from an electronic database of nucleicacid sequences and incorporating the nucleic acid segment into acomponent polynucleotide associated with the nucleic acid requestNR_(i). In some embodiments, the nucleic acid segment is a portion of agene, a promoter, a terminator, or a gene.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request NR_(i) specifies a nucleicacid segment having an approximate start point or an approximate endpoint and the expansion of step 204 defines an exact start point or anexact endpoint for the nucleic acid segment for incorporation into thecomponent polynucleotide corresponding to NR_(i) based on one or moreendpoint selection criteria. In some embodiments, the endpoint selectioncriterion is avoiding low complexity DNA sequence or avoiding arestriction site.

In some embodiments, the expansion of step 204 comprises obtaining anucleic acid segment specified by a nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁,. . . , NR_(n)} and inverting the nucleic acid segment relative to anaturally occurring orientation of the nucleic acid segment prior toincorporation of the nucleic acid segment into a componentpolynucleotide associated with the nucleic acid request NR_(i).

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} specifies an inline sequence to be incorporated into a nucleicacid sequence corresponding to NR_(i) during step 204, and step 204comprises inserting the inline sequence into the nucleic acid sequencecorresponding to NR_(i) thereby forming a component polynucleotideassociated with NR_(i).

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} specifies a nucleic acid segment within a gene that is to berewritten with one or more synonymous codons before incorporation into acomponent polynucleotide corresponding to NR_(i) during step 204, andstep 204 comprises replacing the nucleic acid segment with the one ormore synonymous codons.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} specifies that a nucleic acid segment is to be rewritten withsynonymous codons, before incorporation into a component polynucleotidecorresponding to the nucleic acid request NR_(i), so that the nucleicacid segment is maximally dissimilar relative to a naturally occurringinstance of the nucleic acid segment and step 204 comprises rewritingthe nucleic acid segment with synonymous codons so that the nucleic acidsegment is maximally dissimilar relative to a naturally occurringinstance of the nucleic acid segment and incorporating the rewrittennucleic acid segment in a component polynucleotide corresponding to thenucleic acid request NR_(i).

In some embodiments, expanding step 204 comprises an iteration between(i) expansion of {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} to a parse tree and (ii) usingthe parse tree to rewrite {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} in simpler form, untilno NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} can be rewritten in simpler form.Then, any of the above-identified expansion operations are performed onany of the {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} written out in simpler form. Parsetrees and related compiler design principles are disclosed in ModernCompiler Design, Grune et al., John Wiley & Sons Ltd., New York, 2001,which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

Step 206.

In step 206, the plurality of component polynucleotides that wereexpanded from the plurality of nucleic acid requests are arranged into acontiguous arrangement AR_(i). In typical embodiments, annealable linkernucleic acid sequences, from a predetermined library of annealablelinker nucleic acid sequences 64, are used to combine the componentpolynucleotides corresponding to the plurality of nucleic acid requests{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into the contiguous arrangement AR_(i). In typicalembodiments, such selection of linker nucleic acid sequences is limitedto the design criterion that any given linker nucleic acid sequence inthe library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64 only be used once in anygiven engineered nucleic acid construct. It will be appreciated that thepredetermined library of annealable linker nucleic acid sequences 64 isa virtual library, not an actual library of nucleic acid sequences.Nevertheless, the virtual library contains predetermined annealablelinker nucleic acid sequences that are designed to advantageouslycombine component polynucleotides into an engineered nucleic acidconstruct. In particular, such annealable linker nucleic acid sequencesprovide the component polynucleotides with complementary termini thatare utilized in a splice overlap extension assembly reaction followed bypolymerase chain reaction to assemble the component polynucleotides intoan assembled polynucleotide with an ordered sequence. The generalproperties of such annealable linker nucleic acid sequences aredisclosed in section 5.14 below.

In some embodiments, consistent with the properties of annealable linkernucleic acid sequences disclosed in section 5.14 below, thepredetermined library of linkers 64 has a structure illustrated in FIG.7. The exemplary library of linkers 64 includes categories 702 oflinkers. An example of one such category 702 is high G-C content.Annealable linker nucleic acid sequences in this category have a highG-C content, i.e., the number of guanine and cytosine nucleotides in theannealable linker nucleic acid sequence as a percentage of the totalnumber of bases in the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence.Annealable linker nucleic acid sequences that have a high G-C contentare generally useful in the methods of the invention because a high G-Ccontent generally provides for a high T_(m), which in turn may providefor more specific priming during an assembly reaction and for time andprocess savings by allowing combination of the annealing and extensionsteps of SOE/PCR. This category of annealable linker nucleic acidsequences is disclosed in more detail in section 5.14 below.

Another exemplary category 702 of annealable linker nucleic acidsequences is high A-T content. Annealable linker nucleic acid sequencesin this category have a high A-T content, i.e., the number of adenineand thymine nucleotides in the annealable linker nucleic acid sequenceas a percentage of the total number of bases in the annealable linkernucleic acid sequence. A high A-T content may provide for reducedpropensity of the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence to formsubstantial secondary structures, which may be of particular concernwhen the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence is used to assemblecomponent polynucleotides comprising a promoter and a protein codingsequence into a assembled polynucleotide in which the annealable linkernucleic acid sequence is positioned between the promoter and the proteincoding sequence. This category of annealable linker nucleic acidsequences is disclosed in more detail in section 5.14 below.

For each category 702 of annealable linker nucleic acid sequence, thereis a set of 3′ linkers (LA linkers) and a corresponding set of 5′linkers (LB linkers). The 5′ linkers (LA) are designed for the 5′ end ofa component polynucleotide where the 3′ linkers (LB) are designed forthe 3′ end of a component polynucleotide. Each linker is assigned anumber. For instance, referring to FIG. 7, category 702-1 includes the702-1-A set of 5′ linkers {704-1-LA₁, 704-1-LA₂, . . . , 704-1-LA_(n)}and the 702-1-B set of 3′ linkers {704-1-LB₁, 704-1-LB₂, . . . ,704-1-LB_(n)}, category 702-2 includes the 702-2-A set of 5′ linkers{704-2-LA₁, 704-2-LA₂, . . . , 704-2-LA_(m)} and the 702-2-B set of 3′linkers {704-2-LB₁, 704-2-LB₂, . . . , 704-2-LB_(m)}, and so forth.

Referring to FIG. 7, in some embodiments, the library of linker nucleicacid sequences 64 has one category. In some embodiments, the library oflinker nucleic acid sequences 64 has two categories, (e.g., A-T rich andG-C rich). In some embodiments, the library of linker nucleic acidsequences 64 has three categories. In some embodiments, the library oflinker nucleic acid sequences 64 has four or more categories, five ormore categories, six or more categories, ten or more categories, or onehundred or more categories. In some embodiments, there are one or more,two or more, three or more, four or more, five or more, ten or more, ortwenty or more 5′ LA linkers 704 in a given category 702. In someembodiments, there are one or more, two or more, three or more, four ormore, five or more, ten or more, or twenty or more 5′ LB linkers 704 ina given category 702. In some embodiments, there is the same number of5′ LA linkers 704 as 5′ LB linkers 704 in any given category 702 in thelibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences 64.

In some embodiments, the library 64 of linker nucleic acid sequencesconsists of 100 linker nucleic acid sequences 704 or less. In someembodiments, the predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequencesconsists of 50 linker nucleic acid sequences 704 or less. In someembodiments, the predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequencesconsists of 20 linker nucleic acid sequences 704 or less. In someembodiments, the library 64 of linker nucleic acid sequences consists of100 linker nucleic acid sequences 704 or less per category 702. In someembodiments, the predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequencesconsists of 50 linker nucleic acid sequences 704 or less per category702. In some embodiments, the predetermined library of linker nucleicacid sequences consists of 20 linker nucleic acid sequences 704 or lessper category 702.

Advantageously, in some embodiments, for a given category 702-X, eachlinker 704-X-LB_(i), upon denaturation to single stranded form, iscapable of hybridizing to the complement of 704-X-LA_(i+1). Forinstance, in such embodiments, 704-1-LB₁ is capable of hybridizing tothe complement of 704-1-LA₂, 704-2-LB₁ is capable of hybridizing to thecomplement of 704-2-LA₂, and so forth.

In alternative embodiments, for a given category 702-X, each linker704-X-LB_(i), upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of 704-X-LA_(i−1). For instance, in suchembodiments, 704-1-LB₂ is capable of hybridizing to the complement of704-1-LA₁, 704-2-LB₂ is capable of hybridizing to the complement of704-2-LA₁, and so forth. For ease of reference herein, the embodiment inwhich, for a given category 702-X, each linker 704-X-LB_(i), upondenaturation to single stranded form, is capable of hybridizing to thecomplement of 704-X-LA_(i+1) will be presented. Those of skill in theart will appreciate that in any such example, there exists acorresponding example based upon the principle that for a given category702-X, each linker 704-X-LB_(i), upon denaturation to single strandedform, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of 704-X-LA_(i−1).Such alternative examples and embodiments are within the scope of thepresent disclosure.

Consider the case where an arrangement AR_(i) specifies that componentpolynucleotides CN1 and CN2 are to be contiguously linked together suchthat CN1 is directly upstream of CN1 and CN2 is a promoter for CN2.Because CN1 is a promoter for CN2, a category 702-1 of linker nucleicacid sequences is chosen for the 3′ end of CN1 and the 5′ end of CN2. Tosatisfy other design constraints, category 702-2 of linker nucleic acidsequences is chosen for the 5′ end of CN1 and the 3′ end of CN2. One ofthe many arrangements that would satisfy these design criteria is:

-   -   5′-(704-2-LA₁)-CN1-(704-1-LB₁)-3′,5′-(704-1-LA₂)-CN2-(704-2-LB₂)-3′        because 704-1-LB₁ is capable of hybridizing to the complement of        704-1-LA₂ to form the construct:    -   5′-(704-2-LA₁)-CN1-(704-1-LB₁)-CN2-(704-2-LB₂)-3′.

More generally, in the instance where there is only a single category702 of annealable linker nucleic acid sequences, the contiguousarrangement AR_(i) comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation,

A=an ordered set {X₁, . . . ,X_(t)},

where,

-   -   t is a positive integer greater than 1,    -   each i is an integer in the set of integers {1, . . . , t},    -   each X_(i) comprises 5′-LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i)-3′,    -   each LB, is a linker nucleic acid sequence in the predetermined        library 64 of linker nucleic acid sequences,    -   each NA_(i) is a component polynucleotide in the plurality of        component polynucleotides,    -   each LB_(i) for i less than t, upon denaturation to single        stranded form, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of        LA_(i+1), thereby forming the nucleic acid sequence:    -   5′-LA₁-NA₁, . . . , LB_(n−1)-NA_(n)-LB_(n)-3′.

The more complex embodiment in which there are multiple categories oflinker nucleic acid sequences used in an arrangement merely alters therequirement that each LB for i less than t, upon denaturation to singlestranded form, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1)to specify that each LB_(i) of a respective category 702, for i lessthan t, upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1) in the same respectivecategory 702. Such annealable linker nucleic acid sequences, and theirability to assemble the component polynucleotides into an assembledpolynucleotide with the specified ordered sequence by a splice overlapextension assembly reaction followed by polymerase chain reaction(SOE/PCR), as disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/622,401(Pub. No. 2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009, which is herebyincorporated by reference in its entirety as well as section 5.14,below. Such assembly methods can be used to assemble any number ofcomponent polynucleotides into one or more assembled polynucleotides. Insome embodiments, the methods provided herein result in the assembly of2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, or more componentpolynucleotides into one or more assembled polynucleotides.

In some embodiments, the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) comprises:

A=an ordered set {X₁, . . . ,X_(t)},

B=NA₀-LB₀, and

C=LA_(t+1)-NA_(t+1),

where,

t is a positive integer greater than 1,

each i is an integer in the set of integers {1, . . . , t},

each X_(i) comprises 5′-LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i)-3′,

each LB_(i) is a linker nucleic acid sequence in the predeterminedlibrary 64 of linker nucleic acid sequences,

each NA_(i) is a component polynucleotide in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides identified in step 204,

each LB_(i), for i less than t, upon denaturation to single strandedform, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1), therebyforming the nucleic acid sequence:

-   -   5′-LA₁-NA₁, . . . , LB_(N-1)-NA_(N)-LB_(N)-3′,

LB₀ is a linker nucleic acid sequence in the predetermined library oflinker nucleic acid sequences,

NA₀ and NA_(t+1) are each component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides, the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) comprising,in a 5′ to 3′ orientation,

A,B,C, and

where,

LB₀, upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of LA₁, and

LB_(t), upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of LA_(t+1), so that the nucleic acidconstruct comprises the nucleic acid sequence:

-   -   5′-NA₀-LB_(O), . . . , LB_(t−1)-NA_(t)-LB_(t)-NA_(t+1)-3′.

In some embodiments, upon denaturation of X_(i) in A, each LB_(i), for iless than t, is capable of selectively hybridizing to the complement ofLA_(i+1) compared to each other linker nucleic acid sequence LA_(y) orLB_(y), or their complements, in A, where each y is an integer, otherthan i, in the set of integers {1, . . . , t}. In some embodiments, anLA_(i) or an LB_(i) of an X_(i) in A is at least 24 nucleotides inlength and has a melting temperature of at least 60° C.

In some embodiments, a contiguous arrangement AR_(i) comprises, in a 5′to 3′ orientation,

D=an ordered set {Q₁, . . . ,Q_(n)}

where,

a is a positive integer greater than 1,

each i is an integer in the set of integers {1, . . . , a},

each Q_(i) comprises 5′-RA_(i)-LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i)-RB_(i)-3′,

each LB, is a linker nucleic acid sequence from the predeterminedlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences,

each NA_(i) is a component polynucleotide in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides, and

each LB_(i), for i less than a, upon denaturation to single strandedform and upon cleavage of each restriction site RA_(i) and RB_(i), iscapable of hybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1), thereby formingthe engineered nucleic acid construct comprising the nucleic acidsequence:

-   -   5′-LA₁-NA₁, . . . , LB_(a−1)-NA_(a)-LB_(a)-3′.

In some embodiments, a contiguous arrangement AR_(i) in the set of {AR₁,. . . , AR_(m)} contiguous arrangements comprises, in a 5′ to 3′orientation,

D=an ordered set {Q₁, . . . ,Q_(a)},

E=RA₀-NA₀-LB₀-RB₀, and

F=RA_(a+1)-LA_(a+1)-NA_(a+1)-RB_(a+1),

where,

a is a positive integer greater than 1,

each i is an integer in the set of integers {1, . . . , a},

each Q_(i) comprises 5′-RA_(i)-LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i)-RB_(i)-3′,

each LB_(i) is a linker nucleic acid sequence from the predeterminedlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences,

each NA_(i) is a component polynucleotide in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides, and

each LB_(i), for i less than a, upon denaturation to single strandedform and upon cleavage of each restriction site RA_(i) and RB_(i), iscapable of hybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1), thereby formingthe engineered nucleic acid construct comprising the nucleic acidsequence:

-   -   5′-LA₁-NA₁, . . . , LB_(a−1)-NA_(a)-LB_(a)-3′,

LB₀ is a linker nucleic acid sequence from the predetermined library oflinker nucleic acid sequences,

restriction sites RA₀, RB₀, RA_(a+1) and RB_(a+1) are each independentlycleavable by one or more type IIS restriction endonucleases,

restriction sites RA₀ and RB₀ are oriented so that cleavage of RA₀ andRB₀ separates their respective recognition and cleavage sites from theresulting nucleic acid molecule that comprises NA₀-LB₀,

restriction sites RA_(a+1) and RB_(a+1) are oriented so that cleavage ofRA_(a+1) and RB_(a+1) separates their respective recognition andcleavage sites from the resulting nucleic acid molecule that comprisesNA_(a+1)-LB_(a+1), and

NA₀ and NA_(a+1) are each component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides, the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) comprising,in a 5′ to 3′ orientation,

D,E,F, and

where

-   -   LB₀, upon denaturation to single stranded form and upon cleavage        of RB₀, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of LA₁, and    -   LB_(n) upon denaturation to single stranded form and upon        cleavage of RB_(a), is capable of hybridizing to the complement        of LA_(a+1), so that the nucleic acid construct comprises the        nucleic acid sequence:    -   5′-NA₀-LB₀, . . . , LB_(a−1)-NA_(a)-LB_(a)-NA_(a+1)-3′.

In some embodiments, upon denaturation of Q_(i) in D and upon cleavageof each restriction site RA_(i) and RB_(i) in D, each LB_(i), for i lessthan a, is capable of selectively hybridizing to the complement ofLA_(i+1) compared to each of the other linker nucleic acid sequencesLA_(y) or LB_(y), or their complements, in D, wherein each y is aninteger, other than i, in the set of integers {1, . . . , a}. In someembodiments an LA_(i) or an LB_(i) in a Q_(i) in D is at least 24nucleotides in length and has a melting temperature of at least 60° C.In some embodiments each RA_(i) and each RB_(i) in Q is cleavable bySapI or LguI restriction endonuclease. In some embodiments, eachrestriction site RA_(i) and each restriction site RB_(i) isindependently cleavable by one or more type IIS restrictionendonucleases, where each of restriction site RA_(i) and eachrestriction site RB_(i) is oriented so that cleavage of a respectiverestriction site RA_(i) and a respective restriction site RB_(i)separates their recognition and cleavage sites from the resultingnucleic acid molecule LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i).

It will be appreciated that, in many instances, the actual order of thecomponent polynucleotides is not important. For instance, unlessotherwise specified by a requesting molecular biologist, the nucleicacid requests:

-   -   HÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1, and    -   HÔ::pSLN1>ADH1::pFBA1>ADH2        are equivalent in that, in either case, pFBA>ADH2 and pSLN1>ADH1        are inserted at the HO locus. As this example demonstrates, any        of several different linker 704 pairs from the library of linker        nucleic acid sequence 64 can be used to form a valid arrangement        of HÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1. To illustrate, expansion of        HÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1 at step 204 results in the component        polynucleotides: 5′-HO insertion sequence, pFBA1, ADH2, pSLN1,        ADH1, and the 3-HO insertion sequence. One valid arrangement of        these component polynucleotides would order pFBA1>ADH2 before        pSLN1>ADH1 and another valid arrangement would order pSLN1>ADH1        before pFBA1>ADH2. Focusing on the former exemplary arrangement        pFBA1>ADH2 before pSLN1>ADH1, step 206 could use linker nucleic        acid sequences from the library of nucleic acid sequence 64 to        specify 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′, 5′-LA₂-ADH2-LB₂-3′,        5′-LA₃-pSLN1-LB₃-3′, 5′-LA₄-ADH1-LB₄-3′, where the HO insertion        sequences are not considered in the example. For ease of        disclosure and understanding, the assumption is made in this        example that the library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64        either has a single category 702 or that all the linkers used in        the exemplary arrangement are of the same category 702 so that        the more simple notation LA_(x), LB_(x) may be used to denote        the linkers rather than the more complex notation 704-X-LA_(m),        704-X-LB_(m). Thus, in this example, the respective        complementary termini LB₁, LA_(n+1) are utilized in a splice        overlap extension assembly reaction followed by polymerase chain        reaction (SOE/PCR) to assemble the component polynucleotides,        with linkers not added, into an engineered nucleic acid with an        ordered sequence 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-ADH2-LB₂-pSLN1-LB₃-ADH1        LB₄-3′.

Alternatively, in the other valid arrangement, pSLN1>ADH1 precedespFBA1>ADH2, and step 206 uses the linker nucleic acid sequences from thelibrary of nucleic acid sequence 64 to define 5′-LA₁-pSLN1-LB₁-3′,5′-LA₂-ADH1-LB₂-3′, 5′-LA₃-pFBA1-LB₃-3′, 5′-LA₄-ADH2-LB₄-3′. In thisalternative, the respective complementary termini LB₁, LA_(n+1) areutilized in a splice overlap extension assembly reaction followed bypolymerase chain reaction (SOE/PCR) to assemble the componentpolynucleotides into an engineered nucleic acid with an ordered sequence5′-LA₁-pSLN1-LB₁-ADH1-LB₂-pFBA₁-LB₃-ADH2-LB₄-3′. It will be appreciatedthat the first and last component polynucleotides in the arrangement mayalso include linkers so that they anneal with the HO insertionsequences. Thus, the above example is given merely to depict how severaldifferent valid arrangements may arise rather than to provide a completesequence of an engineered nucleic acid with all attendant linkers.

While only two valid arrangements are provided in the example above, thenumber of valid arrangements that will achieve the specifications of theplurality of nucleic acid requests received in step 202 can beextensive, particularly when there are a number of componentpolynucleotides that need not be placed in a particular order. Thenumber of permutations of n distinct component polynucleotides, whoseorder does not matter is n*(n−1)*(n−2)* . . . *2*1, which number iscalled “n factorial” and written “n!”. Thus, consider an example inwhich an arrangement has 15 component nucleotides, for which 5 of thecomponent nucleotides can be arranged in any order. In this case, therewould be 5*(5−1)*(5−2)*2*1=120 different possible arrangements of thecomponent nucleotides, each of which would validly accomplish theplurality of nucleic acid requests received in step 202. As this exampledemonstrates, in some embodiments, there are 2 or more, 3 or more, 4 ormore, 10 or more, 1000 or more or even 10,000 possible validarrangements of the component polynucleotides that encode the pluralityof nucleic acid requests.

One example where component nucleotides can be arranged in any orderarises when several different genes are to be inserted into a givenlocus, each under a different promoter. Typically, the order of suchgenes is not important as long as each respective inserted gene isdriven by the promoter requested for the respective gene. Moreover, intypical embodiments, a selectable marker is added to an engineeredconstruct to facilitate identification of clones that contain theengineered construct. The location of this selectable marker typicallydoes not matter so long as it does not interrupt the relationshipbetween a gene and its regulatory elements (e.g., promoter, terminator,enhancer, etc.). Where such a selectable marker is used, 5′ and 3′linkers from the library of linker nucleic acid sequences are added tothe ends of the selectable marker as was the case for the componentpolynucleotides of step 204.

In some embodiments a first component polynucleotide is identical to asecond component polynucleotide in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides from expansion step 204. In such embodiments, acontiguous arrangement that would cause the first componentpolynucleotide and the second component polynucleotide to run in thesame direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct is barred. Thisis accomplished by running one of the two polynucleotides in the 5′ to3′ direction and the other of the two polynucleotides in the 3′ to 5′direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments a first component polynucleotide has a high degreeof sequence similarity to a second component polynucleotide in theplurality of component polynucleotides from expansion step 204. Forexample, the first component polynucleotide can be at least 70%, 75%,80%, 85%, 90% or 95% identical to the second component polynucleotide.In some embodiments, the first component polynucleotide comprises atleast 100 contiguous nucleotides having at least 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%or 95% identity to the second polynucleotide. In such embodiments, acontiguous arrangement that would cause the first componentpolynucleotide and the second component polynucleotide to run in thesame direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct is barred. Thisis accomplished by running one of the two polynucleotides in the 5′ to3′ direction and the other of the two polynucleotides in the 3′ to 5′direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, the arranging of step 206 comprises inserting aselectable marker having a nucleic acid sequence into a contiguousarrangement AR_(i). In some such embodiments, the engineered nucleicacid construct comprises a first PCR product having a first part of theselectable marker and a second PCR product, having a second part of theselectable marker, where the first PCR product, running in the 5′ to 3′direction, combines with the second PCR product, running in the 3′ to 5′direction, to form the engineered nucleic acid construct with theselectable marker. Advantageous methods for such constructs aredisclosed in are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No.12/622,401 (Pub. No. 2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009, which ishereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

Step 208.

In step 208, a score S_(i) is determined for AR_(i). To accomplish this,a query of a freezer store database 62 is made to determine whether acorresponding freezer store includes all or a portion of AR_(i). Forexample, consider the example in which the plurality of nucleic acidrequests is HÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1 and the arrangement generated instep 206 comprises the component polynucleotides 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′,5′-LA₂-ADH2-LB₂-3′, 5′-LA₃-pSLN1-LB₃-3′, 5′-LA₄-ADH1-LB₄-3′, where eachLB upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable of hybridizingto the complement of LA_(i+1), and where HO insertion sequences are notconsidered solely to simplify the example. A query is made of thefreezer store database 62 to determine whether any of the componentpolynucleotides are present as source constructs.

An exemplary illustration of the architecture of a freezer storedatabase 62 is provided in FIG. 6A. Freezer store database 62 comprisesinformation about a plurality of source constructs 602. Each sourceconstruct 602 comprises one or more component polynucleotides 604. Intypical embodiments, each source construct 602 is in circular vectorform. An exemplary embodiment of a source construct 602 is an assemblyvector. Assembly vectors are described in Section 5.13, below.

In typical embodiments, each respective source construct 602 in thefreezer store indexed by freezer store database 62 contains a selectablemarker and this selectable marker must match the selectable marker thathas been selected for the engineered nucleic acid construct in order forthe component polynucleotides within the respective source construct tobe evaluated against the component polynucleotides of the AR_(i).

In typical embodiments, a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′termini, of each respective component polynucleotide 604 in the one ormore component polynucleotides encoded by the one or more physicallypresent source constructs 602 is bound to a corresponding linker in thelibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences 64.

In some embodiments, a component polynucleotide 604 in a sourceconstruct 602 is considered a match to a component polynucleotide inAR_(i) when (i) the sequence of the component polynucleotide 604 matchesthe sequence of the component polynucleotide in AR_(i), (ii) a 3′ or 5′terminus of the component polynucleotide 604 is bound to a linker thatwas used for the respective component polynucleotide in step 206 to formAR_(i), and (iii) the selectable marker for the source construct 602that contains the component polynucleotide 604 is the same selectablemarker that is specified for the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, a component polynucleotide 604 in a sourceconstruct 602 is considered a match to a component polynucleotide inAR_(i) when (i) the sequence of the component polynucleotide 604 matchesthe sequence of the component polynucleotide in AR_(i), (ii) the 3′terminus of the component polynucleotide 604 is bound to a linker thatwas used for the 3′ terminus of the respective component polynucleotidein step 206 to form AR_(i), (iii) the 5′ terminus of the componentpolynucleotide 604 is bound to a linker that was used for the 5′terminus of the respective component polynucleotide in step 206 to formAR_(i), and (iv) the selectable marker for the source construct 602 thatcontains the component polynucleotide 604 is the same selectable markerthat is specified for the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, a component polynucleotide 604 in a sourceconstruct 602 is considered a match to a component polynucleotide inAR_(i) when (i) the sequence of the component polynucleotide 604 matchesthe sequence of the component polynucleotide in AR_(i) and (ii) a 3′ or5′ terminus of the component polynucleotide 604 is bound to a linkerthat was used for the respective component polynucleotide in step 206 toform AR_(i).

In some embodiments, a component polynucleotide 604 in a sourceconstruct 602 is considered a match to a component polynucleotide inAR_(i) when (i) the sequence of the component polynucleotide 604 matchesthe sequence of the component polynucleotide in AR_(i), (ii) a 3′ or 5′terminus of the component polynucleotide 604 is bound to a linker thatwas used for the respective component polynucleotide in step 206 to formAR_(i), (iii) the selectable marker for the source construct 602 thatcontains the component polynucleotide 604 is the same selectable markerthat is specified for the engineered nucleic acid construct, and (iv)the orientation (5′ to 3′ or 3′ to 5′) of the component polynucleotide604 in the source construct 602 matches the orientation of the componentpolynucleotide in AR_(i).

In some embodiments, a component polynucleotide 604 in a sourceconstruct 602 is considered a match to a component polynucleotide inAR_(i) when (i) the sequence of the component polynucleotide 604 matchesthe sequence of the component polynucleotide in AR_(i), (ii) the 3′terminus of the component polynucleotide 604 is bound to a linker thatwas used for the 3′ terminus of the respective component polynucleotidein step 206 to form AR_(i), (iii) the 5′ terminus of the componentpolynucleotide 604 is bound to a linker that was used for the 5′terminus of the respective component polynucleotide in step 206 to formAR_(i), (iv) the selectable marker for the source construct 602 thatcontains the component polynucleotide 604 is the same selectable markerthat is specified for the engineered nucleic acid construct, and (v) theorientation (5′ to 3′ or 3′ to 5′) of the component polynucleotide 604in the source construct 602 matches the orientation of the componentpolynucleotide in AR_(i).

In some embodiments, a component polynucleotide 604 in a sourceconstruct 602 is considered a match to a component polynucleotide inAR_(i) when (i) the sequence of the component polynucleotide 604 matchesthe sequence of the component polynucleotide in AR_(i), (ii) a 3′ or 5′terminus of the component polynucleotide 604 is bound to a linker thatwas used for the respective component polynucleotide in step 206 to formAR_(i), and (iii) the orientation (5′ to 3′ or 3′ to 5′) of thecomponent polynucleotide 604 in the source construct 602 matches theorientation of the component polynucleotide in AR_(i).

Thus, in typical embodiments, information beyond that which isillustrated in FIG. 6A is stored for each source construct 602. In someembodiments, the selectable marker of each source construct 602 isstored in the freezer store database 62. In some embodiments, the 5′ and3′ linker of each component polynucleotide 604 is stored in freezerstore database 62. In some embodiments, the full nucleic acid sequenceof each component polynucleotide 604 and any attached linkers is storedin freezer store database 62. In some embodiments the quantity of eachsource construct 602 existing in the freezer store is stored in thefreezer store database 62.

FIG. 8 provides a snapshot of representative source constructs 602 andthe information that is stored for each source construct 602 in anexemplary embodiment. In the exemplary embodiment, freezer storedatabase 62 includes a unique identifier 802 and a name 804 for eachsource construct 602. For each source construct 602 in this exemplaryembodiment, freezer store database 62 also includes an identity 806 of alinker, from the library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64, that isused for the source construct insert. For each source construct 602 inthis exemplary embodiment, freezer store database 62 also includes thedirection (5′ to 3′ or 3′ to 5′) of the source construct insert. Foreach source construct 602 in this exemplary embodiment, freezer storedatabase 62 includes the breed 810 (e.g., GST) and the source 812 (e.g.,S. cerevisiae, E. coli, etc.) of the source construct 602. For eachsource construct 602 in this exemplary embodiment, freezer storedatabase 62 includes a name of the insert 812 (component polynucleotide)and a status (e.g., available, requested) 818 of the source construct602. For each source construct 602 in this exemplary embodiment, freezerstore database 62 includes an available concentration 820 of the sourceconstruct 602 in the associated freezer store. For each source construct602 in this exemplary embodiment, freezer store database 62 optionallyincludes a popularity of the source construct, for instance, representedby positive and/or negative votes 822 by users of the source construct602.

Each of the source constructs 602 indexed by freezer store database 62is physically present in a collection of freezers that are eachproximately located with respect to each other and that are each ownedby the same entity. In some embodiments, the collection of freezers isdeemed to be proximately located when they are in the same building,same campus, or within five miles of each other. In some embodiments,the collection of freezers is deemed to be proximately located when itis possible to retrieve any source construct identified in the freezerstore database within thirty minutes, within twenty minutes, within 10minutes, within five minutes, or within one minute.

In some embodiments, the freezer store database 602 comprisesinformation for 1000 or more source constructs 602 and the correspondingfreezer store contains 1000 or more source constructs. In someembodiments, the freezer store database 602 comprises information for10,000 or more source constructs 602 and the corresponding freezer storecontains 10,000 or more source constructs. In some embodiments, thefreezer store database 602 comprises information for 50,000 or moresource constructs 602 and the corresponding freezer store contains50,000 or more source constructs. In some embodiments, the freezer storedatabase 602 comprises information for 100,000 or more source constructs602 and the corresponding freezer store contains 100,000 or moreconstructs. In some embodiments, the freezer store database 602comprises information for 500,000 or more source constructs 602 and thecorresponding freezer store contains 500,000 or more constructs.

As illustrated in FIG. 6A, each source construct 602 comprise one ormore component polynucleotides 604. Each such component polynucleotide604 may or may not correspond to a component polynucleotide identifiedin expansion step 604. For instance, consider the case where expansionstep 602 specifies the component polynucleotide 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′,where the nucleic acid sequences are shown added to the componentpolynucleotide. It is possible that none of the componentpolynucleotides 604 in freezer store database 62 will match5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′. Moreover, it is possible that a componentpolynucleotide 604 in freezer store database 62 contains the promoterpFBA1 but not the linkers 5′-LA₁ and LB₁-3′. For instance, the componentpolynucleotide 604 that contains pFBA1 may in fact be5′-LA₂-pFBA1-LB₂-3′. In this case, the component polynucleotide5′-LA₂-pFBA1-LB₂-3′ will not be considered a match to5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′ because the linkers do not match up.

In the form illustrated in FIG. 6A, each of the componentpolynucleotides 604 for a given source construct 602 are listedsequentially in their contiguous 5′ to 3′ order. Thus, referring tosource construct 602, the construct comprises 5′-componentpolynucleotide 1-1 component polynucleotide 1-2 component polynucleotide1-A 3′.

To exhaustively query the freezer store database 62 for presence ofcomponent polynucleotides, a number of different queries are made. Insome embodiments, these queries are performed in any order. In someembodiments, these queries are performed simultaneously, concurrently orsequentially. In some embodiment, only a subset of these queries aremade. FIGS. 4A and 4B collectively list out an exhaustive set of queriesthat could be made for the exemplary AR_(i) 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′,5′-LA₂-ADH2-LB₂-3′, 5′-LA₃-pSLN1-LB₃-3′, 5′-LA₄-ADH1-LB₄-3′ whichencodes the plurality of nucleic acid requestsHÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1. Among the queries that are made are queriesfor the absence or presence of each of 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′,5′-LA₂-ADH2-LB₂-3′, 5′-LA₃-pSLN1-LB₃-3′, 5′-LA₄-ADH1-LB₄-3′ in sourceconstructs in the freezer store database 62. These componentpolynucleotides are illustrated in FIG. 4A. This can be tested, forexample, by a first query in which a determination is made as to whetherthe sequence 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′ is found in any source construct indatabase 62, a second query in which a determination is made as towhether the sequence 5′-LA₂-ADH2-LB₂-3′ is found in any source constructin database 62, a third query in which a determination is made as towhether the sequence 5′-LA₃-pSLN1-LB₃-3′ is found in any sourceconstruct in database 62, a fourth query in which a determination ismade as to whether the sequence 5′-LA₄-ADH1-LB₄-3′ is found in anysource construct in database 62. If one or more of these four sequencesare in the freezer store database 62, they likely are each in adifferent assembly vector. Assembly vectors are described in furtherdetail in Section 5.13 below. Assembly vectors are a form of sourceconstruct in accordance with the present disclosure. As discussed above,in typical embodiments, a component polynucleotide 604 in freezer storedatabase 602 is not deemed a match to a query component polynucleotidein AR_(i) unless they use the same 3′ and 5′ linkers.

In some optional embodiments, in addition to querying for the presenceof single component polynucleotides in source constructs in the freezerstore database 62, queries are made for all possible subsets of thearrangement AR_(i) in a single source construct 602 represented infreezer store database 62. These component polynucleotides areillustrated in FIG. 4B. For instance, in the example presented, inaddition to making a query for the presence of each single componentpolynucleotide, a query is made to determine if any of the componentpolynucleotides found FIG. 4B are in the freezer store database 62. AsFIGS. 4A and 4B collectively show, in the case where there are fourcomponent polynucleotides collectively representing the plurality ofnucleic acid requests where each respective component polynucleotide isbound by linkers, a total of 4*(4−1)*2*1 queries are made. Moregenerally, in the case of n component polynucleotides collectivelyrepresenting the plurality of nucleic acid requests where eachrespective polynucleotide request is bound by at least one linker at its5′ or 3′ end, a total of 4*(4−1)*2*1 queries are made, which number iscalled “n factorial” and written “n!”. Source constructs 602 that encodemore than one component polynucleotide are referred to as stitchvectors. Stich vectors are otherwise identical to assembly vectorsaccept that they include two or more component polynucleotides incontiguous order, where the two or more component polynucleotides areeach separated by a linker from the library of nucleic acid sequences64.

In some embodiments, the 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in a stitch vectoris bound to a corresponding linker from the predetermined library oflinker nucleic acid sequences. For instance, consider the case where astitch vector comprises component polynucleotides A and B. In apreferred embodiment, component polynucleotides would be encoded asLA_(x)-A-LB_(x)-B-LB_(x+1).

A contribution to the score S_(i) is made for the arrangement AR_(i)when one or more source constructs are identified as being physicallypresent in a freezer store, where the one or more physically presentsource constructs collectively encode all or a portion of AR_(i). Forinstance, consider a first use case in which an arrangement AR_(i)comprises twenty component polynucleotides. Upon querying the freezerstore database 62, a determination is made that four of the twentycomponent polynucleotides are physically present in the freezer storedatabase 62 and that each of the four component polynucleotides uselinker nucleic acid sequences specified for the four componentpolynucleotides by the AR_(i). In this case, the arrangement AR_(i)receives a score of four arbitrary units. Each arbitrary unit is for oneof the four component polynucleotides that are physically present in thefreezer store database 62. Alternatively, suppose that upon querying thefreezer store database 62, the determination is made that ten of thetwenty component polynucleotides are physically present in the freezerstore database 62 and that each of these ten component polynucleotidesuse linker nucleic acid sequences specified for the ten componentpolynucleotides by the AR_(i). The arrangement would receive a score often arbitrary units.

Other scoring methods in which a contribution is made to the score S_(i)for an arrangement AR_(i) when one or more source constructs 602 thatencode all or a portion of AR_(i) are identified as being physicallypresent in a freezer store are possible. For example, a lookup table mayinclude a score to be added to S_(i) for the occurrence of any givencomponent polynucleotide of step 204 in the one or more sourceconstructs. For instance, consider the case in which a first sourceconstruct comprises a first component polynucleotide and a second sourceconstruct comprises a second component polynucleotide. To determine thecontribution made by the first component polynucleotide, a lookup tableis consulted to retrieve the value of the first componentpolynucleotide. To determine the contribution made by the secondcomponent polynucleotide, a lookup table is consulted to retrieve thevalue of the second component polynucleotide. Consider the case in whichthe first component polynucleotide has a value of three arbitrary unitsand the second component polynucleotide has a value of seven arbitraryunits. In this case, the total contribution of the first and secondcomponent polynucleotides is ten arbitrary units.

In another scoring method in accordance with the present disclosure, thescore of a component polynucleotide is determined by a length of thecomponent polynucleotide relative to the length of the engineerednucleic acid. For instance, consider the case in which a componentpolynucleotide is thirty percent of the total length of the engineerednucleic acid construct. In this instance, the component polynucleotide,when present in a qualifying source construct represented in freezerstore database 62, will contribute a sufficient number of arbitraryunits to achieve 30 percent of a perfect score. In some embodiments, thesource construct is qualifying when it uses the same selectable markerspecified for the engineered nucleic acid construct and when thespecified component polynucleotide uses the same linkers called for thespecified component polynucleotide in AR_(i).

In light of the present disclosure, those of skill in the art willappreciate that a broad range of scoring schemes in which a contributionis made to S_(i) when one or more component polynucleotides 604 arepresent in source constructs in a freezer store are possible and allsuch scoring schemes are within the scope of the present invention. Thedisclosed scoring schemes are simply meant to illustrate some of themany possible scoring schemes.

In some embodiments, the 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in the one or morecomponent polynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically presentsource constructs is bound to a corresponding linker from thepredetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequences. This facilitatesthe construction of the engineered nucleic acid construct through spliceoverlap extension assembly reaction followed by polymerase chainreaction (SOE/PCR), as disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No.12/622,401 (Pub. No. 2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009, which ishereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.

In some embodiments, step 208 comprises determining whether a sourceconstruct having all or a subset of the plurality of componentpolynucleotides, in the contiguous order specified by the contiguousarrangement AR_(i), is present in the freezer store, and a contributionthe source construct makes to the score S_(i) for the contiguousarrangement AR_(i) is dependent upon a number of componentpolynucleotides in the source construct that are in the contiguous orderspecified by the contiguous arrangement AR_(i).

In some embodiments, step 208 determines a score S_(i) for a contiguousarrangement AR_(i) by (i) identifying a first source construct in thefreezer store, the first source construct having a first subset of theplurality of component polynucleotides, in the contiguous orderspecified by the contiguous arrangement AR_(i), (ii) identifying asecond source construct in the freezer store, the second sourceconstruct having a second subset of the plurality of componentpolynucleotides, in the contiguous order specified by the contiguousarrangement AR_(i), where there is no overlap between the first subsetand the second subset. A first contribution to the score S_(i) for thecontiguous arrangement AR_(i) is based upon a number of componentpolynucleotides in the first source construct that are in the contiguousorder specified by the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) and a secondcontribution to the score S_(i) for the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) isbased upon a number of component polynucleotides in the second sourceconstruct that are in the contiguous order specified by the contiguousarrangement AR_(i).

In some embodiments, step 208 determines a score S_(i) for a contiguousarrangement AR_(i) by identifying a set of {C₁, . . . , C_(q)} sourceconstructs in the freezer store, where q is a positive integer greaterthan 1, for a contiguous arrangement AR_(i) in the set of contiguousarrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each respective source constructC_(i) in {C₁, . . . , C_(q)} having a corresponding subset S_(i) ofcomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotidesidentified in the expansion step 204, in the contiguous order specifiedby the contiguous arrangement AR_(i), where the corresponding subsetS_(i) of component polynucleotides is not found in any other sourceconstruct in {C₁, . . . , C_(q)}. In other words, the componentpolynucleotides in any given source construct C_(i) in {C₁, . . . ,C_(q)} are not found in any other source construct in {C₁, . . . ,C_(q)}. In such embodiments, a contribution to the score S_(i) forAR_(i) from each respective C_(i) in {C₁, . . . , C_(q)} is based upon anumber of component polynucleotides in C_(i) that are in a contiguousorder specified by AR_(i).

In some embodiments the one or more physically present source constructsselected for AR_(i) collectively encode a portion of AR_(i). In someembodiments, the one or more component polynucleotides in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i) is lessthan 90 percent of a nucleic acid sequence defined by AR_(i). In someembodiments, the one or more component polynucleotides in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i) is lessthan 80 percent of a nucleic acid sequence defined by AR_(i). In someembodiments, the one or more component polynucleotides in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i) is lessthan 60 percent, less than 50 percent, less than 40 percent, less than30 percent, less than 20 percent or less than 10 percent of a nucleicacid sequence defined by AR_(i). In some embodiments, the one or morecomponent polynucleotides in the one or more physically present sourceconstructs identified for AR_(i) is more than 10 percent of a nucleicacid sequence defined by AR_(i). In some embodiments, the one or morecomponent polynucleotides in the one or more physically present sourceconstructs identified for AR_(i) is more than 20 percent, more than 30percent, more than 40 percent, more than 50 percent, more than 60percent or more than 80 percent of a nucleic acid sequence defined byAR_(i).

Step 210.

In step 210, a determination is made as to whether a threshold number ofarrangements have been evaluated. In some embodiments, a thresholdnumber of arrangements have been evaluated when all possiblearrangements of the component polynucleotides have been scored. It willbe appreciated that, in some instances, the order of some of thecomponent polynucleotides must remain fixed. For instance, the componentpolynucleotide encoding a promoter for a gene is to immediately precedethe component polynucleotide for the gene itself. However, as discussedabove, in many instances such as where multiple genes are being insertedinto a locus, component polynucleotides may be arranged in severaldifferent ways. Thus, in the embodiment that requires that each possiblearrangement be evaluated, these component polynucleotides are permutedthrough each possible arrangement to construct the set of {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)} arrangements and each possible arrangement is scored insuccessive or concurrent instances of steps 206 and 208.

In some embodiments, arrangements of the component polynucleotides thatwould cause a repeat sequence of greater than a predetermined number ofbases to arise in the engineered nucleic acid construct are barred. Insome embodiments, this threshold number is ten nucleic acids, elevennucleic acids, twelve nucleic acids, thirteen nucleic acids, fourteennucleic acids, fifteen nucleic acids, sixteen nucleic acids, seventeennucleic acids, eighteen nucleic acids, nineteen nucleic acids, twentynucleic acids, twenty-one nucleic acids, twenty-two nucleic acids,twenty-three nucleic acids, twenty-four nucleic acids, or twenty-fivenucleic acids or more.

In some embodiments, a threshold number of arrangements has beenevaluated when five or more, ten or more, twenty or more, thirty ormore, forty or more, fifty or more, one hundred or more, two hundred ormore, three hundred or more, four hundred or more, five hundred or more,or one thousand or more different arrangements have been evaluated.

In some embodiments, repetition of steps 206 and 208 or any other formof execution of these steps 206 and 208 (e.g., concurrent, etc.) resultsin a set of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}. In someembodiment the threshold number of arrangements has been evaluated(created) when the set of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}consists of each possible unique complete contiguous arrangement of thecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides.In such embodiments, contiguous arrangements of the componentpolynucleotides that place component polynucleotides in positions thatwill not construct the plurality of nucleic acid requests are notconsidered possible arrangements. For instance, arrangements that wouldcause a component polynucleotide encoding a promoter to be somewhereother than at the 5′ end of the component polynucleotide encoding thegene to be expressed by the promoter are not considered allowed. In someembodiments, the threshold number of arrangements has been evaluated(created) when the set of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}consists of a randomized subset of all possible unique completecontiguous arrangements of the component polynucleotides in theplurality of component polynucleotides. In some embodiments, thisthreshold number is ten percent multiplied by the number of possibleunique complete contiguous arrangements of the component polynucleotidesin the plurality of component polynucleotides, aside from thosearrangements that are barred because they would not enact the pluralityof nucleic acid requests. In some embodiments, this threshold number istwenty percent, thirty percent, forty percent, fifty percent, sixtypercent, seventy percent, eighty percent or ninety percent multiplied bythe number of possible unique complete contiguous arrangements of thecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides,aside from those arrangements that are barred because they would notenact the plurality of nucleic acid requests.

Step 212.

In step 212, a final contiguous arrangement AR_(f) in {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)} having a score S_(i) that meets a selection criterion isselected as an optimal contiguous arrangement. In some embodiments, theselection criterion is achieving a maximum score and the arrangementAR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} that has a maximum score, determined inan instance of step 208, relative to the scores of all otherarrangements in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} is selected as the optimalcontiguous arrangement. In some embodiments, the selection criterion isexceeding a threshold score and any arrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)} having a score determined in an instance of step 208 thatexceeds this threshold score is selected as the optimal contiguousarrangement. In some embodiments, the selection criterion is achieving aminimum score and the arrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} thathas a minimum score, determined in an instance of step 208, relative tothe scores of all other arrangements in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} isselected as the optimal contiguous arrangement. In some embodiments, theselection criterion is falling below a threshold score and anyarrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} having a score determined inan instance of step 208 that falls below this threshold score isselected as the optimal contiguous arrangement.

In some embodiments, step 212 is done after each instance of step 208,rather than after step 210 as shown in FIG. 2, and the selectioncriterion is identification of the first AR_(i) to have a score thatexceeds a first predetermined threshold or falls below a secondpredetermined threshold.

Step 214.

In step 214, one or more primer pairs are calculated based upon thefinal contiguous arrangement AR_(f). Each primer pair in the one or moreprimer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion of AR_(f) notrepresented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(f).

In FIG. 5, element 502 represents the final contiguous arrangementAR_(f), encoding an engineered nucleic acid. Consider the case in whichthere were three source constructs identified for AR_(f) in the instanceof step 208 in which the score for AR_(f) was computed and that each ofthese three source constructs encodes one component nucleotideidentified in step 204 for the plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR₁,. . . , NR_(m)}. Referring to FIG. 5, the three source constructs encodethe hashed portions 504 of the final contiguous arrangement AR_(f) 502.That is, each hashed portion 504 is a component nucleotide identified instep 204. Thus, what remains unrepresented in AR_(f) 502 are the regions506.

In step 214, primer pairs 508 are calculated in order to encode portions506. For example, unrepresented portions 506 may each be of sufficientsize such that only a single pair of primers 508 is needed for eachunrepresented portion. This is the case illustrated in FIG. 5. However,it is possible that each unrepresented portion 506 requires two or morepairs of primers, three or more pairs of primers, four or more pairs ofprimers in order to amplify such portions 506 from a library of DNA thatincludes the genomic locus of the target organism to which the pluralityof nucleic acid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} is directed.

Furthermore, since portions 506 need to combined with hashed portions504, the arrangement AR_(f) includes linker nucleic acid sequences fromthe library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64 for the portions 506that will allow for such recombination to occur. It will be appreciatedthat portions 506 represent component polynucleotides that could not befound in the freezer store database 62 with the linker nucleic acidsequences specified by AR_(f). In typical embodiments, the linkernucleic acid sequences used for portions 506 is limited to the designcriterion that any given linker nucleic acid sequence in the library oflinker nucleic acid sequences 64 only be used once in any givenengineered nucleic acid construct. By adhering to this design criterion,it is possible to recombine portions 506 with hashed portions 504 usinga splice overlap extension assembly reaction followed by polymerasechain reaction (SOE/PCR), as disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser.No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No. 2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009, which ishereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. Accordingly, insome embodiments, step 214 comprises encoding a linker nucleic acidsequence specified for AR_(f) by the instance of step 206 that madearrangement AR_(f) into a primer in the one or more primer pairscalculated for AR_(f). In some embodiments, step 214 comprises encodingeach respective linker nucleic acid sequence specified for portions 506of AR_(f) by the instance of step 206 that made arrangement AR_(f) intothe corresponding more primer pairs calculated for AR_(f).

In some embodiments, at least one design rule is used to identifysuitable primers in the one or more primer pairs. In some embodiments,the at least one design rule is (i) avoidance of hair pin termini, (ii)avoidance of self-dimerization, (iii) primer length between 17 and 28bases, (v) percent G+C content between fifty and sixty percent, (vi)melting temperature between 55° C. and 80° C., or (vii) avoidance ofruns of three or more Cs or Gs at the 3′ terminus. In some embodimentsany combination of 2, 3, 4, or 5 of the following design rules is usedto identify suitable primers in the one or more primer pairs: (i)avoidance of hair pin termini, (ii) avoidance of self-dimerization,(iii) primer length between 17 and 28 bases, (v) percent G+C contentbetween fifty and sixty percent, (vi) melting temperature between 55° C.and 80° C., or (vii) avoidance of runs of three or more Cs or Gs at the3′ terminus.

As illustrated in FIG. 5, the portions 504 of the contiguous arrangementAR_(f) amplified by the one or more primer pairs 508 and the one or morecomponent polynucleotides 506 in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for AR_(f), in the order specified in thecontiguous arrangement AR_(f), collectively define the engineerednucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct comprises afirst PCR product having a first part of a selectable marker, and asecond PCR product having a second part of a selectable marker, wherethe first PCR product, oriented in a 5′ to 3′ direction, combines withthe second PCR product, oriented in a 3′ to 5′ direction, to form theengineered nucleic acid construct with the selectable marker, and wherethe one or more primer pairs computed for the engineered nucleic acidconstruct comprises a first primer pair and a second primer pair, wherethe first primer pair defines the termini of the first PCR product andthe second primer pair defines the termini of the second PCR product.

Upon completion of step 214, all the components necessary for making anengineered nucleic acid construct are formed. This typically includes anidentification of one or more source constructs in the freezer storesand a set of primer pairs that can be used against a genomic librarythat includes locus L to synthesize the missing source constructs.

In some embodiments, the selecting step 212 further comprises selectinga plurality of contiguous arrangements in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)},including AR_(f), where each contiguous arrangement AR_(i) in theplurality of contiguous arrangements has a score S_(i) that meets aselection criterion. This embodiment differs from what was presentedabove in the sense that multiple arrangements are selected for furtherprocessing, rather than just one, and multiple instances of theengineered nucleic acid constructs are defined. Such an embodiment isdesirable, for instance, in high priority situations in which severaldifferent versions of the engineered nucleic acid construct are testedin vivo to identify one that works the best. In such embodiments, step214 further comprises calculating, for each respective contiguousarrangement AR_(i) in the plurality of contiguous arrangements, one ormore primer pairs based upon the respective contiguous arrangement, theone or more primer pairs collectively capable of amplifying the portionsof the respective contiguous arrangement AR_(i) not represented in theone or more component polynucleotides in the physically present sourceconstructs identified for AR_(i), where the portions of the contiguousarrangement amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one ormore component polynucleotides in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for AR_(i), in the order specified in thecontiguous arrangement AR_(i), collectively define an instance of theengineered nucleic acid construct. In some embodiments, the plurality ofcontiguous arrangements comprises two contiguous arrangements, threecontiguous arrangements, four contiguous arrangements, five contiguousarrangements, six contiguous arrangements, ten contiguous arrangements,twenty contiguous arrangements, thirty contiguous arrangements, fortycontiguous arrangements, or fifty contiguous arrangements.

It will be appreciated that the aforementioned steps, as summarized inFIG. 2, are in silico steps. In some embodiments, the method furthercomprises outputting the nucleic acid construct to a tangible memory, acomputer monitor, or some other non-transitory memory or device. Forinstance, a manifest of primer pairs and component polynucleotides inthe freezer store necessary to synthesize the engineered nucleic acidconstruct is outputted to a tangible memory, a computer monitor or someother non-transitory memory or device. In some embodiments, the methodfurther comprises actual physical synthesis of the engineered nucleicacid construct. For example, the engineered nucleic acid construct canbe synthesized by a splice overlap extension assembly reaction followedby polymerase chain reaction (SOE/PCR), as disclosed in U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No. 2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov.19, 2009, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety aswell as section 5.14, below. Next, the engineered nucleic acid constructcan be contacted with the genome of the target organism or host cellunder conditions suitable for homologous recombination, therebyachieving the plurality of {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} nucleic acid requestsat L.

It will also be appreciated that while the foregoing exemplary methodfor defining an engineered nucleic acid construct having multiplearrangements comprises steps 202, 204, 206, 208, 212, and 214 asillustrated in FIG. 2, other methods are provided herein which compriseonly a subset of the foregoing steps. For example, in other aspects,provided herein are methods for defining an engineered nucleic acidconstruct comprising steps 202, 204 and 206; comprising steps 202, 204,206 and 208; or comprising steps 202, 204, 206, 208 and 212.

5.5 Additional Exemplary Method for Polynucleotide Assembly SingleArrangement

Section 5.4 discloses methods in which several different contiguousarrangements of component polynucleotides, each effecting a commonplurality of nucleic acid requests 50 {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, areevaluated. In some embodiments, referring to FIG. 12, only a singlearrangement that effects a plurality of nucleic acid requests 50 {NR₁, .. . , NR_(n)} is evaluated. Several of the steps in the method disclosedin FIG. 12 are identical to corresponding steps in FIG. 2. Thus, it willbe appreciated that the disclosure for such corresponding stepspresented above in Section 5.4 is equally applicable to the equivalentsteps in the methods summarized in FIG. 12 and disclosed in thissection. Thus, for the sake of brevity and ease of understanding thedisclosure, such teachings will not be repeated in this Section. Stepsin the method illustrated in FIG. 12 that correspond to steps in FIG. 2are given the same number as the step found in FIG. 12, with theexception that the steps are denoted with the prime “′” symbol.

Step 202′.

In step 202′, a plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}are received, where n is a positive integer greater than 1. Each nucleicacid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifies a genetic changeto L. In some embodiments, an identity of a selectable marker isreceived with the plurality of nucleic acid requests in step 202′. Insome embodiments an identity of the selectable marker is determinedwithout human intervention from a predetermined list of selectablemarkers in step 206′ and the selectable marker is included in theengineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifies insertion of an insertion sequence at L. In some embodimentsthe insertion sequence comprises a promoter and a gene to be expressedby the promoter. In some embodiments, the insertion sequence comprises adivergent promoter and a first gene and a second gene driven by thedivergent promoter. In some embodiments the divergent promoter is aback-to-back divergent promoter, an overlapping divergent promoter, or aface-to-face divergent promoter. In some embodiments, the insertionsequence comprises a promoter, a gene, a terminator, an open readingframe, a codon substitution, a nucleic acid substitution, a pointmutation, an insertion mutation, or a deletion mutation. In someembodiments, the insertion sequence comprises a fusable open readingframe without a stop codon.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifies that the entire genomic locus L is to be replaced by theinsertion sequence. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid requestspecifies that a promoter and a gene at L are to be replaced by theinsertion sequence. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid requestspecifies that a divergent promoter and a first gene and a second genedriven by the divergent promoter at L are to be replaced by theinsertion sequence. In some embodiments, the divergent promoter is aback-to-back divergent promoter, an overlapping divergent promoter, or aface-to-face divergent promoter.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifies that a promoter, a gene, a terminator, an open reading frame,a codon substitution, a nucleic acid substitution, a point mutation, aninsertion mutation, or a deletion mutation at L is to be replaced by theinsertion sequence. In some embodiments a nucleic acid request in {NR₁,. . . , NR_(n)} specifies that a fusible open reading frame without astop codon is to be replaced by the insertion sequence. In someembodiments, the insertion sequence includes a first copy of a gene in a3′ to 5′ orientation and a second copy of the gene in a 5′ to 3′orientation, and a bi-directional promoter between the first copy andthe second copy.

Step 204′.

In step 204′, each NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} is expanded into acorresponding component polynucleotide 52, thereby forming a pluralityof component polynucleotides. In some embodiments, the expanding step204′ comprises expanding a first nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} into a first component polynucleotide and a second componentpolynucleotide, where the first component polynucleotide is a promoterand the second component polynucleotide is a gene.

Step 206′.

In step 206′, the plurality of component polynucleotides are arrangedinto a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), where the arranging uses linkernucleic acid sequences from a predetermined library of linker nucleicacid sequences 64 to combine component polynucleotides in the pluralityof component polynucleotides into the contiguous arrangement. In someembodiments, the arranging 206′ comprises inserting a selectable markerhaving a nucleic acid sequence into the contiguous arrangement AR_(i).In some embodiments, the arranging comprises barring an AR_(i) thatwould cause a repeat sequence of greater than a predetermined number ofbases to arise in the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, a first component polynucleotide is identical to asecond component polynucleotide in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides and the arranging of step 206′ addresses this by barringa contiguous arrangement that would cause the first componentpolynucleotide and the second component polynucleotide to run in thesame direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, a first component polynucleotide shares a highdegree of sequence similarity (e.g., at least 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or95%) to a second component polynucleotide in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides. In some embodiments, the first component polynucleotidecomprises at least 100 contiguous nucleotides having at least 70%, 75%,80%, 85%, 90% or 95% identity to the second polynucleotide. In some suchembodiments, the arranging of step 206′ addresses this by barring acontiguous arrangement that would cause the first componentpolynucleotide and the second component polynucleotide to run in thesame direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct.

Step 1208.

In step 1208, one or more source constructs, from a plurality of sourceconstructs physically present in a freezer store, are selected. Each ofthe one or more physically present source constructs encode one or moreof the component polynucleotides. A 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′and 5′ termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in the oneor more component polynucleotides encoded by the one or more physicallypresent source constructs is bound to a respective corresponding linkerthat was used for the corresponding component polynucleotide in step206′ to form the arrangement.

For example, consider the case in which the plurality of nucleic acidrequests is HÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1 and the contiguous arrangementgenerated in step 206′ comprises the component polynucleotides5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′, 5′-LA₂-ADH2-LB₂-3′, 5′-LA₃-pSLN1-LB₃-3′,5′-LA₄-ADH1-LB₄-3′, where each LB_(i), upon denaturation to singlestranded form, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1),and where HO insertion sequences are not considered solely to simplifythe example. A query is made of the freezer store database 62 todetermine whether any of the component polynucleotides are present assource constructs.

An exemplary illustration of the architecture of a freezer storedatabase 62 is provided in FIG. 6A. Freezer store database 62 comprisesinformation about a plurality of source constructs 602. Each sourceconstruct 602 comprises one or more component polynucleotides 604. Intypical embodiments, each source construct 602 is in circular vectorform. An exemplary embodiment of a source construct 602 is an assemblyvector. Assembly vectors are described in Section 5.13, below.

In typical embodiments, each respective source construct 602 in thefreezer store indexed by freezer store database 62 contains a selectablemarker and this selectable marker must match the selectable marker thathas been selected for the engineered nucleic acid construct in order forthe component polynucleotides within the respective source construct tobe evaluated against the component polynucleotides of the AR_(i).

In typical embodiments, a 3′ or 5′ terminus of each respective componentpolynucleotide 604 in the one or more component polynucleotides encodedby the one or more physically present source constructs 602 is bound toa corresponding linker in the library of linker nucleic acid sequences64. Examples of when a component polynucleotide 604 in a sourceconstruct 602 is considered a match to a component polynucleotide in theAR_(i) are addressed in Section 5.4 in conjunction with step 208 of themethods disclosed therein.

Step 1210.

In step 1210, one or more primer pairs are calculated based upon theAR_(i). Each primer pair is capable of amplifying a portion of theAR_(i) not represented in the one or more physically present sourceconstructs identified for the AR_(i). The portions of the AR_(i)amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), in the order specified by the AR_(i),collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct. Methods bywhich such primer pairs are computed are addressed in Section 5.4 inconjunction with step 214 of the methods disclosed therein.

In some embodiments, the calculating step 1210 comprises encoding alinker nucleic acid sequence from a predetermined library of linkernucleic acid sequences specified for the AR_(i) into one or more primersin the one or more primer pairs calculated for the AR_(i).

In some embodiments, the calculating step 1210 comprises applying atleast one design rule to identify primers in the one or more primerpairs. In some embodiments, the at least one design rule is (i)avoidance of hairpin termini, (ii) avoidance of self-dimerization, (iii)a primer length between 17 and 28 bases, (iv) a percent G+C contentbetween fifty and sixty percent, (v) a melting temperature between 55°C. and 80° C., or (vi) avoidance of runs of three or more cytosine orguanines at the 3′ terminus of a primer.

In some embodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct comprises afirst PCR product having a first part of a selectable marker, and asecond PCR product having a second part of a selectable marker, wherethe first PCR product, oriented in a 5′ to 3′ direction, combines withthe second PCR product, oriented in a 3′ to 5′ direction, to form theengineered nucleic acid construct with the selectable marker, and wherethe one or more primer pairs computed for the engineered nucleic acidconstruct comprises a first primer pair and a second primer pair, wherethe first primer pair defines the termini of the first PCR product andthe second primer pair defines the termini of the second PCR product.

Upon completion of step 1210, all the components necessary for making anengineered nucleic acid construct are formed. This typically includes anidentification of one or more source constructs in the freezer storesand a set of primer pairs that can be used against a genomic librarythat includes locus L to synthesize the missing component polynucleicacids and their linkers.

It will be appreciated that the aforementioned steps, as summarized inFIG. 12, are in silico steps. In some embodiments, the method furthercomprises outputting the engineered nucleic acid construct to a tangiblememory, a computer monitor, or some other non-transitory memory ordevice. For instance, a manifest of primer pairs and componentpolynucleotides in the freezer store necessary to synthesize theengineered nucleic acid construct is outputted to a tangible memory, acomputer monitor or some other non-transitory memory or device. In someembodiments, the method further comprises actual physical synthesis ofthe engineered nucleic acid construct. For example, the engineerednucleic acid construct can be synthesized by a splice overlap extensionassembly reaction followed by polymerase chain reaction (SOE/PCR), asdisclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No.2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009, which is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety as well as section 5.14, below. Next, theengineered nucleic acid construct can be contacted with the genome ofthe target organism or host cell under conditions suitable forhomologous recombination, thereby achieving the plurality of {NR₁, . . ., NR_(n)} nucleic acid requests at L.

It will also be appreciated that while the foregoing exemplary methodfor defining an engineered nucleic acid construct having a singlearrangement comprises steps 202′, 204′, 206′, 1208, and 1210 asillustrated in FIG. 12, other methods are provided herein which compriseonly a subset of the foregoing steps. For example, in other aspects,provided herein are methods for defining an engineered nucleic acidconstruct comprising steps 202′, 204′ and 206′; or comprising steps202′, 204′, 206′ and 1208.

5.6 Additional Exemplary Method for Polynucleotide Assembly SingleArrangement

Section 5.4 discloses methods in which several different contiguousarrangements, each effecting a common plurality of nucleic acid requests50 {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} are evaluated. Section 5.5 discloses methods inwhich a single contiguous arrangement is made for a single plurality ofnucleic acid requests 50 {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}. In some embodiments,referring to FIG. 13, several different pluralities of nucleic acidrequests 50 {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} are received and, for each respectiveplurality of nucleic acid requests 50 {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, anarrangement of component polynucleotides that effect the nucleic acidrequests of the respective plurality of nucleic acid requests isevaluated.

Several of the steps in the method disclosed in FIG. 13 are identical tocorresponding steps in FIG. 2. Thus, it will be appreciated that thedisclosure for such corresponding steps presented above in Section 5.4is equally applicable to the equivalent steps in the methods summarizedin FIG. 13 and disclosed in this section. Thus, for the sake of brevityand ease of understanding the disclosure, such teachings will not berepeated in this section. Steps in the method illustrated in FIG. 13that correspond to steps in FIG. 2 are given the same number as the stepfound in FIG. 13, with the exception that the steps are denoted with thedouble prime “″” symbol.

Step 202″.

In step 202″, a plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR_(i,1), . . . ,NR_(i,n)} corresponding to a request to make an engineered nucleic acidconstruct EN_(i) in a plurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} is received. Each nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in{NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifies a genetic change to L. In someembodiments, an identity of a selectable marker is received with theplurality of nucleic acid requests in step 202″. In some embodiments anidentity of the selectable marker is determined without humanintervention from a predetermined list of selectable markers in step206″ and the selectable marker is included in the correspondingengineered nucleic acid construct that is made for the plurality ofnucleic acid requests {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)}.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . ., NR_(i,n)} specifies insertion of an insertion sequence at L. In someembodiments the insertion sequence comprises a promoter and a gene to beexpressed by the promoter. In some embodiments, the insertion sequencecomprises a divergent promoter and a first gene and a second gene drivenby the divergent promoter. In some embodiments the divergent promoter isa back-to-back divergent promoter, an overlapping divergent promoter, ora face-to-face divergent promoter. In some embodiments, the insertionsequence comprises a promoter, a gene, a terminator, an open readingframe, a codon substitution, a nucleic acid substitution, a pointmutation, an insertion mutation, or a deletion mutation. In someembodiments, the insertion sequence comprises a fusable open readingframe without a stop codon.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . ., NR_(i,n)} specifies that the entire genomic locus L is to be replacedby the insertion sequence. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid requestNR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifies that a promoter and agene at L are to be replaced by the insertion sequence. In someembodiments, the nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . ,NR_(i,n)} specifies that a divergent promoter and a first gene and asecond gene driven by the divergent promoter at L are to be replaced bythe insertion sequence. In some embodiments, the divergent promoter is aback-to-back divergent promoter, an overlapping divergent promoter, or aface-to-face divergent promoter.

In some embodiments, a nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . ., NR_(i,n)} specifies that a promoter, a gene, a terminator, an openreading frame, a codon substitution, a nucleic acid substitution, apoint mutation, an insertion mutation, or a deletion mutation at L is tobe replaced by the insertion sequence. In some embodiments a nucleicacid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifies that afusible open reading frame without a stop codon is to be replaced by theinsertion sequence. In some embodiments, the insertion sequence includesa first copy of a gene in a 3′ to 5′ orientation and a second copy ofthe gene in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, and a bi-directional promoterbetween the first copy and the second copy.

Step 204″.

In step 204″, each NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} is expandedinto a plurality of component polynucleotides, thereby forming acorresponding plurality of component polynucleotides. In someembodiments, the expanding step 204″ comprises expanding a first nucleicacid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} into a firstcomponent polynucleotide and a second component polynucleotide, wherethe first component polynucleotide is a promoter and the secondcomponent polynucleotide is a gene.

Step 206″.

In step 206″, the corresponding plurality of component polynucleotidesof the last instance of step 204″ are arranged into a contiguousarrangement AR_(i) using linker nucleic acid sequences from apredetermined library 64 of linker nucleic acid sequences to combine thecomponent polynucleotides in the corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides into the contiguous arrangement AR_(i). In someembodiments, the arranging 206″ comprises inserting a selectable markerhaving a nucleic acid sequence into the contiguous arrangement AR_(i).In some embodiments, the arranging comprises barring an AR_(i) thatwould cause a repeat sequence of greater than a predetermined number ofbases to arise in the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, a first component polynucleotide is identical to asecond component polynucleotide in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides and the arranging of step 206″ addresses this by barringa contiguous arrangement that would cause the first componentpolynucleotide and the second component polynucleotide to run in thesame direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, a first component polynucleotide shares a highdegree of sequence similarity (e.g., at least 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or95%) to a second component polynucleotide in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides. In some embodiments, the first component polynucleotidecomprises at least 100 contiguous nucleotides having at least 70%, 75%,80%, 85%, 90% or 95% identity to the second polynucleotide. In some suchembodiments, the arranging of step 206″ addresses this by barring acontiguous arrangement that would cause the first componentpolynucleotide and the second component polynucleotide to run in thesame direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct.

In some embodiments, multiple arrangements are computed for a pluralityof nucleic acid requests {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} corresponding to arequest to make an engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in aplurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs {EN_(i), . . . ,EN_(k)}. For example, in one embodiment, for at least one NR_(i) in{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, the arranging step 206″ comprises arranging theplurality of corresponding component polynucleotides corresponding toNR_(i) from the expanding step 204″ into a set of temporary contiguousarrangements {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)} where, for each TAR_(i) in {TAR₁, .. . , TAR_(z)}, the arranging step 206″ uses linker nucleic acidsequences from a predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequencesto combine component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides into TAR_(i). Then, a score S_(k) is determined for eachrespective TAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, where, for eachrespective TAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, the corresponding scoreS_(k) is determined by a method comprising (a) selecting one or moresource constructs from a plurality of source constructs physicallypresent in a freezer store, where the one or more source constructscollectively encode all a portion of TAR_(k) (e.g., one or morecomponent polynucleotides identified for TAR_(k), one or more componentpolynucleotides identified for TAR_(k) in which a 3′ or 5′ terminus isbound to a linker identified in step 206 for the one or more componentpolynucleotides, etc.) and (b) calculating S_(k) based on an amount ofTAR_(k) represented by the one or more source constructs. The contiguousarrangement TAR_(f) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(m)} having a score S_(f) thatmeets a selection criterion is selected as the optimal contiguousarrangement, where the selected TAR_(f) is deemed to be the contiguousarrangement AR_(i) for EN_(i). Methods that can be used for scoring andexemplary selection criterion are disclosed in steps 208 and 212 ofSection 5.4 and can be used for the embodiments described in thissection. In this way, {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} are formed, where eachAR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} is for a different NR_(m) in {NR₁, . . ., NR_(n)}.

Step 1308.

In step 1308, a determination is made as to whether the plurality ofnucleic acid requests, for each EN_(i) in the plurality of engineerednucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, has been received and/orprocessed. It will be appreciated that the query of step 1308 is but oneof many possible methods of processing the plurality of nucleic acidrequests for each EN_(i) in the plurality of engineered nucleic acidconstructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. In alternative embodiments, multipleinstances of steps 202″, 204″, and 206″ are run simultaneously orconcurrently, each set of instances 202″, 204″, and 206″ for a differentEN_(i) in the plurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . .. , EN_(k)}. In still other embodiments, multiple instances of steps202″ are run, each for a different EN_(i) in the plurality of engineerednucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, then multiple instancesof steps 204″ are run, each for a different EN_(i) in the plurality ofengineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, and finallymultiple instances of steps 206″ are run, each for a different EN_(i) inthe plurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}.

The net result of steps 202″, 204″, and 206″ and 1308 is that, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, the corresponding pluralityof component polynucleotides from the corresponding instance of step204″ is arranged into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), where thearranging uses linker nucleic acid sequences from a predeterminedlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences to combine componentpolynucleotides in the corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides into the corresponding AR_(i), thereby forming aplurality of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i)in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} representing an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}.

Step 1310.

In step 1310, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, oneor more source constructs from a plurality of source constructsphysically present in a freezer store are selected. Each of the one ormore physically present source constructs for a respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} encodes one or more of the componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides for therespective EN_(i). A 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini,of each respective component polynucleotide in the one or more componentpolynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically present sourceconstructs for a respective EN_(i) is bound to a corresponding linkernucleic acid that was used for the respective component polynucleotidein the corresponding instance of the arranging step 206″ to form theAR_(i) that corresponds to the EN_(i).

For example, consider the case in which the plurality of nucleic acidrequests {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} is HÔ::pFBA1>ADH2::pSLN1>ADH1 andthe corresponding contiguous arrangement AR_(i) generated in step 206″comprises the component polynucleotides 5′-LA₁-pFBA1-LB₁-3′,5′-LA₂-ADH2-LB₂-3′, 5′-LA₃-pSLN1-LB₃-3′, 5′-LA₄-ADH1-LB₄-3′, where eachLB upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable of hybridizingto the complement of LA_(i+1), and where HO insertion sequences are notconsidered solely to simplify the example. A query is made of thefreezer store database 62 to determine whether any of the componentpolynucleotides are present as source constructs.

An exemplary illustration of the architecture of a freezer storedatabase 62 is provided in FIG. 6A. Freezer store database 62 comprisesinformation about a plurality of source constructs 602. Each sourceconstruct 602 comprises one or more component polynucleotides 604. Intypical embodiments, each source construct 602 is in circular vectorform. An exemplary embodiment of a source construct 602 is an assemblyvector. Assembly vectors are described in Section 5.13, below.

In typical embodiments, each respective source construct 602 in thefreezer store indexed by freezer store database 62 contains a selectablemarker and this selectable marker must match the selectable marker thathas been selected for the engineered nucleic acid construct in order forthe component polynucleotides within the respective source construct tobe evaluated against the component polynucleotides of the AR_(i).

In typical embodiments, a 3′ or 5′ terminus of each respective componentpolynucleotide 604 in the one or more component polynucleotides encodedby the one or more physically present source constructs 602 is bound toa corresponding linker in the library of linker nucleic acid sequences64. Examples of when a component polynucleotide 604 in a sourceconstruct 602 is considered a match to a component polynucleotide in theAR_(i) are addressed in Section 5.4 in conjunction with step 208 of themethods disclosed therein.

Step 1312.

In step 1312, one or more primer pairs is calculated based upon AR_(i),where each primer pair is capable of amplifying a portion of AR_(i) notrepresented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for ARi. The portions of the ARi amplified by the one or moreprimer pairs and the one or more component polynucleotides in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for the AR_(i), inthe order specified by the AR_(i), collectively define the engineerednucleic acid construct one or more primer pairs are calculated basedupon the AR_(i). Each primer pair is capable of amplifying a portion ofthe AR_(i) not represented in the one or more physically present sourceconstructs identified for the AR_(i). The portions of the AR_(i)amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), in the order specified by the AR_(i),collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i).Methods by which such primer pairs are computed are addressed in Section5.4 in conjunction with step 214 of the methods disclosed therein.

In some embodiments, the calculating step 1312 comprises encoding alinker nucleic acid sequence from a predetermined library of linkernucleic acid sequences specified for the AR_(i) into one or more primersin the one or more primer pairs calculated for the AR_(i).

In some embodiments, the calculating step 1312 comprises applying atleast one design rule to identify primers in the one or more primerpairs. In some embodiments, the at least one design rule is (i)avoidance of hairpin termini, (ii) avoidance of self-dimerization, (iii)a primer length between 17 and 28 bases, (iv) a percent G+C contentbetween fifty and sixty percent, (v) a melting temperature between 55°C. and 80° C., or (vi) avoidance of runs of three or more cytosine orguanines at the 3′ terminus of a primer.

In some embodiments, an engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in{EN_(i), . . . , EN_(k)} comprises a first PCR product having a firstpart of a selectable marker, and a second PCR product having a secondpart of a selectable marker, where the first PCR product, oriented in a5′ to 3′ direction, combines with the second PCR product, oriented in a3′ to 5′ direction, to form the engineered nucleic acid construct withthe selectable marker, and where the one or more primer pairs computedfor the engineered nucleic acid construct comprises a first primer pairand a second primer pair, where the first primer pair defines thetermini of the first PCR product and the second primer pair defines thetermini of the second PCR product.

Upon completion of step 1312, all the components necessary for makingeach engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in a plurality ofengineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} are provided.This typically includes an identification of one or more sourceconstructs in the freezer stores and a set of primer pairs that can beused against a genomic library that includes locus L to synthesize themissing component polynucleotides.

It will be appreciated that the aforementioned steps, as summarized inFIG. 13, are in silico steps. In some embodiments, the method furthercomprises outputting the plurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} to a tangible memory, a computer monitor, or someother non-transitory memory or device. For instance, a manifest ofprimer pairs and component polynucleotides in the freezer storenecessary to synthesize each engineered nucleic acid constructs in theplurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} isoutputted to a tangible memory, a computer monitor, or some othernon-transitory memory or device. In some embodiments, the method furthercomprises actual physical synthesis of each of the engineered nucleicacid constructs. For example, each of the engineered nucleic acidconstructs can be synthesized by a splice overlap extension assemblyreaction followed by polymerase chain reaction (SOE/PCR), as disclosedin U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No. 2010/0136633A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009, which is hereby incorporated by reference inits entirety as well as section 5.14, below. Next, each of theengineered nucleic acid constructs can be contacted with the genome ofthe target organism or host cell under conditions suitable forhomologous recombination.

In some embodiments, the method disclosed in FIG. 13 and described inthis section further comprises synthesizing, for each respective EN_(i)in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, EN_(i), as defined by the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . .. , AR_(m)} that represents EN_(i), using the one or more primer pairscalculated for AR_(i) in step 1312 and the one or more physicallypresent source constructs selected for AR_(i) in step 1310. In someembodiments, the method further comprises transforming each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} synthesized in the above synthesizingstep into a different host cell. In some embodiments, the method furthercomprises selecting a plurality of host cells, where each host cell inthe plurality of host cells comprises an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}such that the plurality of host cells represents at least ten percent,at least twenty percent, at least thirty percent, at least fortypercent, at fifty sixty percent, at least sixty percent, at leastseventy percent, at least eighty percent, at least ninety percent, or atleast at least ninety-five percent of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}. In someembodiments, an engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . ., EN_(k)} comprises a selectable marker having a nucleic acid sequenceand the host cell into which the engineered nucleic acid constructEN_(i) is transformed is selected by propagating the transformed hostcell on selectable media corresponding to the selectable marker.

In some embodiments, the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineerednucleic acid constructs comprises one hundred engineered nucleic acidconstructs and the transforming step described above is performed withintwo weeks of completion of the instances of the expanding step 204″. Insome embodiments, the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineerednucleic acid constructs comprises two hundred engineered nucleic acidconstructs and the transforming is performed within three weeks ofcompletion of the instances of the expanding step 204″. In someembodiments, the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleicacid constructs comprises three hundred engineered nucleic acidconstructs and the transforming step is performed within three weeks ofcompletion of the instances of the expanding step 204″. In someembodiments, the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleicacid constructs comprises four hundred engineered nucleic acidconstructs and the transforming step is performed within three weeks ofcompletion of the instances of the expanding step 204″. In someembodiments, the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleicacid constructs comprises five hundred engineered nucleic acidconstructs and the transforming step is performed within three weeks ofcompletion of the instances of the expanding step 204″.

It will be appreciated that while the foregoing exemplary method fordefining an engineered nucleic acid construct having a singlearrangement comprises steps 202″, 204″, 206″, 1308, 1310, and 1312 asillustrated in FIG. 13, other methods are provided herein which compriseonly a subset of the foregoing steps. For example, in other aspects,provided herein are methods for defining an engineered nucleic acidconstruct comprising steps 202″, 204″, and 206″; comprising steps 202″,204″, 206″, and 1308; or comprising steps 202″, 204″, 206″, 1308, and1310.

5.7 Graphical User Interface for Designing Engineered Nucleic AcidConstructs

FIG. 3 further illustrates a graphical user interface 300 for designingengineered nucleic acids. Referring to FIG. 1, in some embodimentinterface 300 is served by engineered nucleic acid assembly module 46 toa client across wide area network 34 (e.g., the Internet). Thus, thepresent disclosure provides an apparatus comprising one or more memoriesand one or more processors, where the one or more memories and the oneor more processors are in electronic communication with each other, theone or more memories encoding a set of instructions for defining aplurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)},where k is an integer greater than 1, each engineered nucleic acidconstruct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} for integration into a genomiclocus L of a target organism or a host cell.

The set of instructions comprise instructions for receiving, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, a corresponding plurality ofnucleic acid requests {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} in digitalalphanumeric format, each nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), .. . , NR_(i,n)} specifying a genetic change to L, where, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is a positive integer thatis the same or different as n for each other EN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}. Examples of a plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR_(i,1), . .. , NR_(i,n)} in digital alphanumeric format are examples 304-1 through304-14 of FIG. 3. For instance, referring to FIG. 3, the first pluralityof nucleic acid requests 304-1 (pACT1>PTC1) specifies driving the PTC1gene using the pATC promoter. Thus, a first engineered nucleic acidconstruct is made that effects these nucleic acid requests. Next, thesecond plurality of nucleic acid requests 304-2 specifies insertion ofthe SKN7 gene, driven by the pSLN1 promoter, into the HO locus. Thus, asecond engineered nucleic acid construct is made that effects thesenucleic acid requests. Advantageously, referring to FIG. 3, all a userneeds to do is paste these requests into box 302. Once this isaccomplished, the user interface 300 appears as illustrated in FIG. 14.Upon pressing the “Submit Genotypes” button 306, each plurality ofnucleic acid requests {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} is then processedusing any of the methods disclosed in sections 5.4, 5.5, or 5.6, above.An exemplary method by each plurality of nucleic acid requests{NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} is presented in this section below.

In accordance with this exemplary method, the set of instructionsfurther comprises instructions for expanding, for each respective EN_(i)in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, each NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)}into a corresponding component polynucleotide having a nucleic acidsequence, thereby forming a corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}.Suitable methods for accomplishing this expansion are described insection 5.4, step 204.

In accordance with this exemplary method, the set of instructionsfurther comprises instructions for arranging, for each respective EN_(i)in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, the corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides from the instructions for expanding into a contiguousarrangement AR_(i), where the instructions for arranging use linkernucleic acid sequences from a predetermined library 64 of linker nucleicacid sequences to combine component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcorresponding component polynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming aplurality of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i)in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} representing an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}. Suitable methods for accomplishing this arranging are describedin section 5.4, step 206.

In accordance with this exemplary method, the set of instructionsfurther comprise instructions for selecting, for each respective EN_(i)in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more source constructs from a pluralityof source constructs physically present in a freezer store, where eachof the one or more physically present source constructs for a respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} encode one or more of the componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides for therespective EN_(i), and where a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in the one or morecomponent polynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically presentsource constructs for a respective EN_(i) is bound to a correspondinglinker nucleic acid that was used for the respective componentpolynucleotide in the arranging to form AR_(i). Suitable methods foraccomplishing this selecting are described in section 5.5, step 1208.

In accordance with this exemplary method, the set of instructionsfurther comprise instructions for calculating, for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon theAR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} that represents EN_(i), where eachprimer pair in the one or more primer pairs for an AR_(i) is capable ofamplifying a portion of AR_(i) not represented in the one or more sourceconstructs identified for AR_(i), where the portions of AR_(i) amplifiedby the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(i), in the order specified by AR_(i), collectivelydefine the engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i). Suitable methodsfor accomplishing this calculating are described in section 5.5, step1210.

In an optional step in accordance with this exemplary method, the set ofinstructions further comprises instructions for outputting to anon-volatile computer memory, a non-transitory computer memory, apersistent data storage, a monitor, or a printer, for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon theAR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(k)} that represents EN_(i), and an identityof each of the one or more source constructs identified by theinstructions for calculating for E_(i).

In some embodiments, for each NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, theinstructions for arranging comprise instructions for arranging theplurality of corresponding component polynucleotides corresponding to aNR_(i) from the instructions for expanding into a set of temporarycontiguous arrangements {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)} where z is a positiveinteger greater than 1 and where, for each TAR_(i) in {TAR₁, . . . ,TAR_(z)}, the instructions for arranging use linker nucleic acidsequences from the predetermined library 64 of linker nucleic acidsequences to combine component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides into TAR_(i). Then, a score S_(k) isdetermined for each respective TAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)},where, for each respective TAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, thecorresponding score S_(k) is determined by a method comprising selectingone or more source constructs from a plurality of source constructsphysically present in a freezer store, where the one or more constructscollectively encode all a portion of TAR_(k), and (b) calculating S_(k)based on an amount of TAR_(k) represented by the one or more sourceconstructs, and (iii) selecting the contiguous arrangement TAR_(f) in{TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)} having a score S_(f) that meets a selectioncriterion as the optimal contiguous arrangement, where the selectedTAR_(f) is deemed to be the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) for EN_(i). Inthis way the set {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} is formed, where each AR_(i) in{AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} is for a different NR_(m) in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)}. In some embodiments, k is ten or greater, k is one hundred orgreater, or k is one thousand or greater.

5.8 Additional Graphical User Interface for Designing Engineered NucleicAcid Constructs

Another aspect of the present disclosure provides an additionalgraphical user interface for designing engineered nucleic acidconstructs. In one such embodiment of the present disclosure, anapparatus comprising one or more memories and one or more processors isprovided, where the one or more memories and the one or more processorsare in electronic communication with each other, the one or morememories encoding a set of instructions for defining an engineerednucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus L of atarget organism or a host cell, using the one or more processors. Insome embodiments, the graphical user interface and the set ofinstructions, is encoded by or directed or otherwise controlled byengineered nucleic acid assembly module 46.

Referring to FIG. 15, the set of instructions comprises instructions forlisting as a table 1502 on a display 26, where the display 26 is inelectronic communication with the one or more processors 22 asillustrated in FIG. 2. Table 1502 comprise a first plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides physically present in a freezer store. Inpractice, table 1502 is populated by all or a portion of the componentpolynucleotides in freezer store database 62. Advantageously, asillustrated in FIG. 15, information is provided for each respectivecomponent polynucleotide 52, such as the identity 802 of the respectivecomponent polynucleotide, the name 804 of the respective componentpolynucleotide, an identity of a 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence 806-A,from the library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64, that is bound tothe 5′ end of the respective component polynucleotide, an identity of a3′ linker nucleic acid sequence 806-B, from the library of linkernucleic acid sequences 64, that is bound to the 3′ end of the respectivecomponent polynucleotide, a direction 808 (5′ to 3′ or 3′ to 5′) of therespective component polynucleotide 52, a breed 810 of the respectivecomponent polynucleotide, a status 1502 of the respective componentpolynucleotide, the creator 1504 of the respective componentpolynucleotide, the creation date 1506 of the respective componentpolynucleotide, a source 812 of the respective component polynucleotide,and any selection tags 1510 that are encoded by the respective componentpolynucleotide.

The set of instructions further comprises instructions for receiving afirst selection of a first component polynucleotide from the table by auser. For instance, the user may select component polynucleotide 51-1 byclicking on the row associated with this component polynucleotide.

Referring to FIG. 16, the set of instructions further comprisesinstructions for displaying, responsive to the first selection, an icon1602 on the display for the first component polynucleotide, where theicon for the first component polynucleotide specifies an identity of a5′ linker nucleic acid sequence and an identity of a 3′ linker nucleicacid sequence bound to the first component polynucleotide, where the 5′linker nucleic acid sequence and the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence arepresent in the electronic library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64that is stored in non-transitory form in the one or more memories. Forinstance, consider the case in which a user selects componentpolynucleotide 52-1 illustrated in FIG. 15 by clicking on the rowassociated with this component polynucleotide. In this instance,responsive to the selection, component polynucleotide 52-1 is displayedas icon 1602-1 on the display. Icon 1602-1 details the 5′ and the 3′linker nucleic acid sequences of component polynucleotide 51-1, “01” and“1”, respectively, from the library of linker nucleic acid sequences 64.In some embodiments, a component polynucleotide does not have a bound 5′linker nucleic acid sequence. In such instances, no 5′ linker nucleicacid sequence is displayed in the icon 1602 for the componentpolynucleotide. In some embodiments, a component polynucleotide does nothave a bound 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence. In such instances, no 3′linker nucleic acid sequence is displayed in the icon 1602 for thecomponent polynucleotide.

The set of instructions further comprises instructions for updating thetable on the display, responsive to the first selection, to provide asecond plurality of component polynucleotides physically present in afreezer store. Each component polynucleotide in the updated tablecomprises a 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence or a 3′ linker nucleic acidsequence that, upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence orthe complement of the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence of the previouslyselected first component polynucleotide. For example, turning to FIG.16, icon 1602-1 indicates that the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence is“3′-1”. Thus, component polynucleotides 52 in the freezer store database62 that include the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence “5′-1” will belisted in the updated table 1502. This is because “3′-1” stands for 1Band “5′-1” stands for 1A, and “5′-1”, upon denaturation to singlestranded form, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of “3′-1”,thereby joining the two component polynucleotides.

The set of instructions further comprises instructions for receiving asecond selection of a second component polynucleotide from the table bya user and instructions for displaying, responsive to the secondselection, an icon on the display for the second componentpolynucleotide, where the icon for the second component polynucleotidespecifies an identity of the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence and anidentity of the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence bound to the secondcomponent polynucleotide. When the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence ofthe second component polynucleotide, upon denaturation to singlestranded form, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of the 3′linker of the first component polynucleotide, the second icon is shownto the right of the first icon on the display, and when the 3′ linkernucleic acid sequence of the second component polynucleotide upondenaturation to single stranded form, is capable of hybridizing to thecomplement of the 5′ linker of the first component polynucleotide, thesecond icon is shown to the left of the first icon on the display. FIG.16 illustrates. Component polynucleotide 1604-1 of FIG. 16, gHppFMD,includes a 5′-1 linker nucleic sequence and a 3′-A linker nucleic acidsequence. The 5′-1 linker nucleic sequence, upon denaturation to singlestranded form, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of “3′-1”.Thus, as illustrated in FIG. 17, when component polynucleotide 1604-1 ofFIG. 16 is selected, an icon 1602-2 for gHppFMD is depicted to the rightof icon 1602-1. The defined engineered nucleic acid construct comprisesthe first component polynucleotide and the second componentpolynucleotide.

The above-identified process can be repeated. For instance, in responseto the second selection, the table is once again updated to include thecomponent polynucleotides, from freezer store database 62, that have atleast one linker nucleic acid sequence that, upon denaturation to thesingle stranded form, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of anexposed 5′ or 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence in the growing chain ofcomponent polynucleotides depicted as icons 1602. As illustrated in FIG.17, one such linker nucleic acid is “5′-A” because, upon denaturation tothe single stranded form, it is capable of hybridizing to the complementof exposed 3′-A of icon 1602-2 of FIG. 17. Thus, upon selection of, forexample, component polynucleotide 1702-1 “ATGGGTgPSgcgGTcyc1[136S:-1E]”of FIG. 17, the component polynucleotide is added as icon 1602-3 to the3′ end of the growing chain of icons illustrated in FIG. 18. Asillustrated in FIG. 19, once a user has fully defined an engineerednucleic acid construct, it may be sent to a clone manger application forfurther processing, as illustrated by icon 1902 of FIG. 19.

In some embodiments, the electronic library of linker nucleic acidsequences consists of 100 linker nucleic acid sequences or less. In someembodiments, the electronic library of linker nucleic acid sequencesconsists of 50 linker nucleic acid sequences or less. In someembodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct comprises, in a 5′ to3′ orientation,

A=an ordered set of component polynucleotides {X₁, . . . ,X_(n)} havingthe sequential order displayed in the display,

where,

-   -   n is a positive integer greater than 1,    -   each i is an integer in the set of integers {1, . . . , n},    -   each X_(i) comprises 5′-LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i)-3′,    -   each LB_(i) is a linker nucleic acid sequence in a predetermined        library of linker nucleic acid sequences,    -   each NA_(i) is a component polynucleotide,    -   each LB_(i), for i less than n, upon denaturation to single        stranded form, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of        LA_(i+1), thereby forming the engineered nucleic acid construct        comprising the nucleic acid sequence:    -   5′-LA₁-NA₁, . . . , LB_(n−1)-NA_(n)-LB_(n)-3′.

In some embodiments:

B=NA₀-LB₀, and

C=LA_(n+1)-NA_(n+1),

where,

-   -   LB₀ is a linker nucleic acid sequence in the electronic library        of linker nucleic acid sequences,    -   NA₀ and NA_(n+1) are each component polynucleotides, the        contiguous arrangement AR_(i) comprising, in a 5′ to 3′        orientation,

A, B, C, and

where

-   -   LB₀, upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable of        hybridizing to the complement of LA₁, and    -   LB_(n) upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable of        hybridizing to the complement of LA_(n+1), so that the        engineered nucleic acid construct comprises the nucleic acid        sequence:    -   5′-NA₀-LB_(O), . . . , LB_(n−1)-NA_(n)-LB_(n)-NA_(n+1)-3′.

5.9 Methods of Querying a Freezer Store Database

Illustrated in FIG. 20 is a graphical user interface 2002 that allowsfor searching for DNA sequences in the freezer store database 62. A userpastes or types a polynucleic acid sequence into interface box 2004.Then, all of the possible matches are displayed, with the option to viewalignment. Referring to FIG. 21, this expands the box and shows acomparison of the search result 2102 with the polynucleic acid querythat was entered. In FIG. 21, the top row of the alignment 2101 is thesearch result, with the query result placed underneath it.

In more detail, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides anapparatus 10 comprising one or more memories 14/36 and one or moreprocessors 22, where the one or more memories and the one or moreprocessors are in electronic communication with each other asillustrated, for example, in FIG. 1. The one or more memories encode aset of instructions for determining whether a nucleic acid sequence ispresent in any source construct in a plurality of source constructsphysically present in a freezer store, using the one or more processors.In some embodiments, the set of instructions is a component or module ofengineered nucleic acid assembly module 46.

The set of instructions comprise instructions for receiving a firstnucleic acid sequence in electronic alphanumeric format using a displayin electronic communication with the one or more memories, asillustrated in FIG. 20. The set of instructions further compriseinstructions for receiving a matching threshold criterion using thedisplay. For example, referring to FIG. 20, a user toggles a similaritythreshold indicator to dial for a similarity threshold of anywhere from30% similarity to 100% similarity. In so doing, the user specifies howsimilar target nucleic acids must be in the plurality of sourceconstructs to the query nucleic acid in order to be considered a match.In some embodiments, the matching threshold criterion is percentidentity rather than percent similarity and the user can toggle anywherein the range of 30% identity to 100% identity for matching nucleicacids.

In some embodiments, the set of instructions further comprisesinstructions for comparing the first nucleic acid sequence with asequence of each respective source construct in the plurality of sourceconstructs indexed by freezer store database 62. When a second nucleicacid sequence that satisfies the matching threshold criterion is foundwithin the sequence of a respective source construct, the instructionsfor comparing further include instructions for displaying an identity ofthe respective source construct. In some embodiments, the plurality ofsource constructs comprises 1000 source constructs. In some embodiments,the plurality of source constructs comprises 10,000 source constructs.In some embodiments, the plurality of source constructs comprises100,000 source constructs.

In some embodiments, when a second nucleic acid sequence that satisfiesthe matching threshold criterion is found within the sequence of arespective source construct, the instructions for comparing furtherinclude instructions for displaying an alignment of the second nucleicacid sequence against the first nucleic acid sequence. See, for example,alignment 2102 of FIG. 21. In FIG. 21, the amino acid sequence (SEQ IDNO. 1) of a nucleic acid sequence alignment between a source construct(SEQ ID NO. 2) and a target construct (SEQ ID NO. 3) is provided.

5.10 Methods of Generating Host Cells Comprising AssembledPolynucleotides

Another aspect provides methods for generating host cells comprising theengineered nucleic acid construct. In some embodiments, the engineerednucleic acid construct is less than 1 kilobase (kb) in size. In someembodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct is at least 1 kb insize. In some embodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct is atleast 2 kb in size. In some embodiments, the engineered nucleic acidconstruct is at least 3 kb in size. In other embodiments, the engineerednucleic acid construct is at least 5 kb in size. In still otherembodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct is at least 6, 7, 8,9, or 10 kb in size. In still other embodiments, the engineered nucleicacid construct is greater than 10 kb in size. In still otherembodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct is greater than 15 kbin size. In still other embodiments, the engineered nucleic acidconstruct is greater than 20 kb in size. In still other embodiments, theengineered nucleic acid construct is greater than 25 kb in size. Instill other embodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct isgreater than 30 kb in size. In still other embodiments, the engineerednucleic acid construct is greater than 35 kb in size. In still otherembodiments, the engineered nucleic acid construct is greater than 40 kbin size.

In some embodiments, methods are provided that comprise transforming ahost cell with an engineered nucleic acid construct generated by themethods of polynucleotide assembly described herein. The engineerednucleic acid construct can be circularized prior to transformation orcan be transformed as a linear molecule. The engineered nucleic acidconstruct can be maintained in a host cell as an extrachromosomalpolynucleotide. Alternatively, the engineered nucleic acid construct canbe integrated into the genome of the host cell, e.g., by host cellmediated homologous recombination. To integrate an engineered nucleicacid construct into the genome by homologous recombination, theengineered nucleic acid construct must comprise at one terminus anucleic acid sequence comprising an upstream genomic targeting sequenceand at the other terminus a nucleic acid sequence comprising adownstream genomic targeting sequence. Accordingly, an engineerednucleic acid construct that is to be integrated into a locus of a hostcell is generated from an assembly composition comprising a firstnucleic acid molecule comprising an upstream chromosomal targetingsequence and a last nucleic acid molecule comprising a downstreamchromosomal targeting sequence, each chromosomal targeting sequencebeing of sufficient length to initiate homologous recombination by thehost cell with its chromosome.

In other embodiments, the methods comprise transforming a host cell witha plurality of engineered nucleic acid construct generated by themethods of polynucleotide assembly described herein. In a particularembodiment, the host cell combines two or more engineered nucleic acidconstruct into a single combined polynucleotide by homologousrecombination. Host cell transformants comprising the combinedpolynucleotides are selected by virtue of expressing a selectable markerthat is generated in the process of combining the assembledpolynucleotides. The method is particularly useful for insertingrelatively large pieces of polynucleotide into a target locus byhomologous recombination. For chromosomal integration to occur, thecombined polynucleotide must comprise an upstream genomic targetingsequence located 5′ or 3′ of the coding sequence of the selectablemarker and a downstream genomic targeting sequence located 3′ or 5′ ofthe coding sequence of the selectable marker, respectively. Genomicintegration as used herein includes chromosomal integration, e.g.,integration of a polynucleotide into a chromosome of a host cell.Suitable chromosomal integration sites in Saccharomyces cerevisiaeinclude but are not limited to the NDT80, HO, GAL2, and GAL1-GAL10-GAL7locus. The method can also be useful for generating host cellscomprising an extrachromosomally maintained polynucleotide, e.g.,vectors and expression plasmids. The stability of either a chromosomallyintegrated or an extrachromosomally maintained combined polynucleotideis increased when the combined polynucleotide does not compriseidentical annealable linker nucleic acid sequences or DNA segmentsarranged as direct repeats that can otherwise initiate additionalhomologous recombination events resulting in the excision of segments ofthe component polynucleotide. Therefore, in some embodiments, theassembled polynucleotides comprise unique annealable linker nucleic acidsequences and DNA segments. In other embodiments, the assembledpolynucleotides contain one or more identical annealable linker nucleicacid sequences or DNA segments that upon combination of the assembledpolynucleotides are arranged as inverted repeats in the combinedpolynucleotide.

The generation of an exemplary combined polynucleotide and integrationof the combined polynucleotide into a chromosome of the host cell byhomologous recombination is illustrated in FIG. 8 of U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No. 2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov.19, 2009 and the corresponding text in the patent application whichdescribes the figure, which is hereby incorporated by reference. Suchtechniques can be used for the engineered nucleic acid constructs of thepresent disclosure. In yet other embodiments, the methods comprisetransforming a host cell with a plurality of engineered nucleic acidconstructs and allowing the host cell to generate one or more engineerednucleic acid constructs by homologous recombination. The engineerednucleic acid construct can be extrachromosomally maintained in the hostcell or integrated into the chromosome of the host cell. The generationof an exemplary assembled polynucleotide by homologous recombination ina host cell and integration of the assembled polynucleotide into thechromosome of the host cell is illustrated in FIG. 9 of U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No. 2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov.19, 2009 and the corresponding text in the patent application whichdescribes the figure, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein.Such techniques can be sued for the generation of a engineered nucleicacid construct by homologous recombination.

Any host cell can be used in the methods describe herein. In particularembodiments, suitable host cells are host cells that are capable ofrecombining polynucleotides based on complementary sequence stretchessuch as provided by the selectable marker segments, genomic targetingsequences, and annealable linker nucleic acid sequences provided herein.Illustrative examples of such host cells include but are not limited toSaccharomyces cerevisiae. Conditions suitable for uptake of DNA by suchhost cells are well known in the art. More details on suitable hostcells are described in Section 5.11 below.

Host cell transformants comprising an engineered nucleic acid constructcan be readily identified by virtue of expressing a selectable markerencoded by the engineered nucleic acid construct that permits selectionfor or against the growth of the cells. The selectable marker may beencoded by a single DNA segment present in an assembly vector of anassembly composition. Alternatively, non-functional segments of theselectable marker may be encoded by DNA segments present in multipleassembly vectors of an assembly composition or in multiple assembledengineered nucleic acid construct such that a functional selectablemarker is generated only upon generation of an assembled polynucleotide(e.g., engineered nucleic acid construct) or upon generation of acombined polynucleotide, respectively.

Auxotrophy can also be used to identify host cell transformantscomprising a chromosomally integrated assembled or combinedpolynucleotide (e.g., engineered nucleic acid construct) when theintegration of the assembled or combined polynucleotide results in thedisruption of a gene that the host cell requires to synthesize acomponent essential for cell growth, thus rendering the cellauxotrophic.

Host cell transformants comprising a chromosomally integrated assembledor combined polynucleotide (e.g., engineered nucleic acid construct) canalso be identified by selecting host cell transformants exhibiting othertraits encoded by individual DNA segments or by combinations of DNAsegments, e.g., expression of peptides that emit light, or by molecularanalysis of individual host cell colonies, e.g., by restriction enzymemapping, PCR amplification, or sequence analysis of isolated assembledpolynucleotides or chromosomal integration sites.

5.11 Host Cells

Another aspect provided herein provides a host cell comprising anengineered nucleic acid construct described above. In certainembodiments, the host cell comprises the engineered nucleic acidconstruct integrated into the host cell genome.

Suitable host cells include any cell in which integration of theengineered nucleic acid construct into a chromosomal or episomal locusis desired. In some embodiments, the host cell is a prokaryotic cell. Insome embodiments, the host cell is a bacterial cell. In someembodiments, the host cell is an Escherichia coli cell. In someembodiments, the host cell is a eukaryotic cell. In some embodiments,the host cell is a mammalian cell. In some embodiments, the host cell isa Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cell, a COS-7 cell, a mouse fibroblastcell, a mouse embryonal carcinoma cell, or a mouse embryonic stem cell.In some embodiments, the host cell is an insect cell. In someembodiments, the host cell is a S2 cell, a Schneider cell, a S12 cell, a5B1-4 cell, a Tn5 cell, or a Sf9 cell. In some embodiments, the hostcell is a unicellular eukaryotic organism cell.

In some embodiments, the host cell is a yeast cell. In some embodiments,the host cell is a diploid yeast cell. In some embodiments, the hostcell is a haploid yeast cell. Useful yeast host cells include yeastcells that have been deposited with microorganism depositories (e.g.IFO, ATCC, etc.) and belong to the genera Aciculoconidium, Ambrosiozyma,Arthroascus, Arxiozyma, Ashbya, Babjevia, Bensingtonia, Botryoascus,Botryozyma, Brettanomyces, Bullera, Bulleromyces, Candida, Citeromyces,Clavispora, Cryptococcus, Cystofilobasidium, Debaryomyces, Dekkara,Dipodascopsis, Dipodascus, Eeniella, Endomycopsella, Eremascus,Eremothecium, Erythrobasidium, Fellomyces, Filobasidium, Galactomyces,Geotrichum, Guilliermondella, Hanseniaspora, Hansenula, Hasegawaea,Holtermannia, Hormoascus, Hyphopichia, Issatchenkia, Kloeckera,Kloeckeraspora, Kluyveromyces, Kondoa, Kuraishia, Kurtzmanomyces,Leucosporidium, Lipomyces, Lodderomyces, Malassezia, Metschnikowia,Mrakia, Myxozyma, Nadsonia, Nakazawaea, Nematospora, Ogataea,Oosporidium, Pachysolen, Phachytichospora, Phaffia, Pichia,Rhodosporidium, Rhodotorula, Saccharomyces, Saccharomycodes,Saccharomycopsis, Saitoella, Sakaguchia, Saturnospora,Schizoblastosporion, Schizosaccharomyces, Schwanniomyces, Sporidiobolus,Sporobolomyces, Sporopachydermia, Stephanoascus, Sterigmatomyces,Sterigmatosporidium, Symbiotaphrina, Sympodiomyces, Sympodiomycopsis,Torulaspora, Trichosporiella, Trichosporon, Trigonopsis, Tsuchiyaea,Udeniomyces, Waltomyces, Wickerhamia, Wickerhamiella, Williopsis,Yamadazyma, Yarrowia, Zygoascus, Zygosaccharomyces, Zygowilliopsis, andZygozyma, among others.

In some embodiments, the yeast host cell is a Saccharomyces cerevisiaecell, a Pichia pastoris cell, a Schizosaccharomyces pombe cell, aDekkera bruxellensis cell, a Kluyveromyces lactis cell, an Arxulaadeninivorans cell, or a Hansenula polymorphs (now known as Pichiaangusta) cell. In a particular embodiment, the yeast host cell is aSaccharomyces cerevisiae cell. In some embodiments, the yeast host cellis a Saccharomyces fragilis cell or a Kluyveromyces lactis (previouslycalled Saccharomyces lactis) cell. In some embodiments, the yeast hostcell is a cell belonging to the genus Candida, such as Candidalipolytica, Candida guilliermondii, Candida krusei, Candidapseudotropicalis, or Candida utilis. In another particular embodiment,the yeast host cell is a Kluveromyces marxianus cell.

In particular embodiments, the yeast host cell is a Saccharomycescerevisiae cell selected from the group consisting of a Baker's yeastcell, a CBS 7959 cell, a CBS 7960 cell, a CBS 7961 cell, a CBS 7962cell, a CBS 7963 cell, a CBS 7964 cell, a IZ-1904 cell, a TA cell, aBG-1 cell, a CR-1 cell, a SA-1 cell, a M-26 cell, a Y-904 cell, a PE-2cell, a PE-5 cell, a VR-1 cell, a BR-1 cell, a BR-2 cell, a ME-2 cell, aVR-2 cell, a MA-3 cell, a MA-4 cell, a CAT-1 cell, a CB-1 cell, a NR-1cell, a BT-1 cell, and a AL-1 cell. In some embodiments, the host cellis a Saccharomyces cerevisiae cell selected from the group consisting ofa PE-2 cell, a CAT-1 cell, a VR-1 cell, a BG-1 cell, a CR-1 cell, and aSA-1 cell. In a particular embodiment, the Saccharomyces cerevisiae hostcell is a PE-2 cell. In another particular embodiment, the Saccharomycescerevisiae host cell is a CAT-1 cell. In another particular embodiment,the Saccharomyces cerevisiae host cell is a BG-1 cell.

In certain embodiments, an engineered nucleic acid construct asdescribed above may be introduced into a host cell using anyconventional technique to introduce engineered nucleic acids into a cellknown in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to, directuptake of the molecule by a cell from solution, or facilitated uptakethrough lipofection using, e.g., liposomes or immunoliposomes;particle-mediated transfection; etc. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,272,065;Goeddel et al., eds, 1990, Methods in Enzymology, vol. 185, AcademicPress, Inc., CA; Krieger, 1990, Gene Transfer and Expression—ALaboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY; Sambrook et al., 1989, MolecularCloning—A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, NY; andAusubel et al., eds., Current Edition, Current Protocols in MolecularBiology, Greene Publishing Associates and Wiley Interscience, NY.Particular methods for transforming yeast cells are well known in theart. See Hinnen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 75:1292-3 (1978);Cregg et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:3376-3385 (1985). Exemplary techniquesinclude but are not limited to, spheroplasting, electroporation, PEG1000 mediated transformation, and lithium acetate or lithium chloridemediated transformation.

5.12 Entry Vectors

In another aspect, provided herein is a vector, i.e., an entry vector,that can be used to prepare an assembly vector. In some embodiments, anentry vector is a circular polynucleotide that comprises a selectablemarker, an origin of replication, and a DNA segment immediately flankedby two restriction sites that facilitate the subcloning of different DNAsegments to be assembled in the assembly methods provided herein. Theentry vector further comprises one or two annealable linker nucleic acidsequences, or an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence and a primerbinding segment, flanking the restriction sites. The entry vectorfurther comprises an additional pair of restriction sites positioned atthe outer flanks of the DNA segment, e.g., that flank the one or twoannealable linker nucleic acid sequences, or the annealable linkernucleic acid sequence and primer binding segment. Thus, in someembodiments, the entry vector is a circular polynucleotide thatcomprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, a restriction site RY, a DNAsegment D, a restriction site RZ, and a restriction site RB. In otherembodiments, the entry vector is a circular polynucleotide thatcomprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, arestriction site RY, a DNA segment D, a restriction site RZ, anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence LB, and a restriction site RB.In other embodiments, the entry vector is a circular polynucleotide thatcomprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, a primerbinding segment PA or an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, arestriction site RY, a DNA segment D, a restriction site RZ, a primerbinding segment PB or an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LB, anda restriction site RB.

In some embodiments, the sequence of the DNA segment D of the entryvector is the lac Z reporter gene. The lac Z reporter gene is useful forfacilitating blue/white selection of colonies transformed with vectorscomprising DNA segments other than lac Z, e.g., during the preparationof an assembly vector described herein.

In some embodiments, the entry vector is a circular polynucleotide thatcomprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, a restriction site RY, a DNAsegment D, a restriction site RZ, and a restriction site RB (i.e.,5′-RA-LA-RY-D-RZ-RB-3′). In some embodiments, the entry vector is acircular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, arestriction site RA, a restriction site RY, a DNA segment D, arestriction site RZ, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LB, anda restriction site RB (i.e., 5′-RA-RY-D-RZ-LB-RB-3′). In someembodiments, the entry vector is a circular polynucleotide thatcomprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, a restriction site RY, a DNAsegment D, a restriction site RZ, an annealable linker nucleic acidsequence LB, and a restriction site RB (i.e.,5′-RA-LA-RY-D-RZ-LB-RB-3′). In some embodiments, the entry vector is acircular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, arestriction site RA, a primer binding segment PA, a restriction site RY,a DNA segment D, a restriction site RZ, an annealable linker nucleicacid sequence LB, and a restriction site RB (i.e.,5′-RA-PA-RY-D-RZ-LB-RB-3′). In some embodiments, the entry vector is acircular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, arestriction site RA, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, arestriction site RY, a DNA segment D, a restriction site RZ, a primerbinding segment PB, and a restriction site RB (i.e.,5′-RA-LA-RY-D-RZ-PB-RB-3′). An exemplary entry vector is provided inFIG. 1A.

The primer binding segment can be any nucleotide sequence that is notcomplementary with any of the annealable linker nucleic acid sequencesthat are used to make an assembled polynucleotide. In some embodiments,the primer binding segment includes a restriction endonucleaserecognition and cleavage site. In some embodiments, the primer bindingsegment is simply one of the available linker nucleic acid sequencesthat are not being used in a particular assembly reaction.

In some embodiments, the nucleic acid sequence of annealable linkernucleic acid sequence LA or LB is at least 24 nucleotides and has aT_(m) of at least 60° C. The restriction sites RY and RZ can be utilizedas cloning sites to introduce various DNA segments for the generation ofan assembly vector. In some embodiments, RY and RZ are not identical insequence. In some embodiments, RY and RZ are cleavable by the samerestriction endonuclease. In some embodiments, RY and RZ are identicalin sequence. In some embodiments, restriction sites RY and RZ arecleavable by a restriction endonuclease that generates staggered ends,i.e. termini having a 5′ or 3′ overhang. In other embodiments,restriction sites RY and RZ are cleavable by a restriction endonucleasethat generates blunt ends.

Although restriction sites RY and RZ can be any restriction site knownin the art, restriction sites recognized by the Type IIS restrictionendonucleases are particularly useful. Type IIS restrictionendonucleases have DNA binding domains that are distinct from theircleavage domains. Therefore, they recognize a specific sequence butcleave at a defined distance away. For example, the Type IIS restrictionendonuclease SchI (which is also known as MlyI) binds to a recognitionsite containing the sequence GAGTC and cleaves four (4) base pairs awayfrom the recognition site, creating a blunt ended DNA molecule. Type IISrestriction sites are particularly useful for the preparation of anassembly vector from an entry vector. For example, in a subcloningprocedure wherein the DNA segment of an entry vector, for example lacZ,is replaced with a DNA segment of interest, excision of lacZ with a TypeIIS restriction endonuclease can result in complete removal of therestriction site recognition sequence. As a result, upon ligation of theDNA segment of interest to the linearized entry vector, extraneoussequence between the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence or theprimer binding segment and the newly introduced DNA segment isminimized.

Thus, in some embodiments, restriction sites RY and RZ are restrictionsites recognizable and cleavable by any Type IIS restrictionendonuclease known in the art. Suitable Type IIS restrictionendonucleases include but are not limited to the following endonucleasesand their isoschizomers, which are indicated in parentheses: Alw26O(BsmAI), AlwI (AclWI, BinI), AsuHPI (HphI), BbvI (Bst71I), BcefI, BstF5I(BseGI, FokI), FauI, HgaI, SapI (LguI), MboII, PleI, SapI, SchI (MlyI),SfaNI, and TspRI, AceIII, BbsI (BbvII, BpiI, BpuAI), Bce83I, BciVI, BfiI(BmrI), BpmI (GsuI), BsaI (Eco31I), BseRI, BsgI, BsmBI (Esp3I), BsmFI,BspMI, BsrDI (Bse3DI), Bsu6I (Eam1104I, Earl, Ksp632I), Eco57I, FauI,MmeI, RleAI, TaqII, and Tth111II. In particular embodiments, restrictionsites RY and RZ are recognizable and cleavable by the SchI restrictionendonuclease.

In some embodiments, RA and RB are not identical in sequence. In someembodiments, RA and RB are cleavable by the same restrictionendonuclease. In some embodiments, RA and RB are identical in sequence.In some embodiments, restriction sites RA and RB are cleavable by arestriction endonuclease that generates staggered ends, i.e. terminihaving a 5′ or 3′ overhang. In other embodiments, restriction sites RAand RB are cleavable by a restriction endonuclease that generates bluntends.

Although restriction sites RA and RB can be any restriction sites knownin the art, restriction sites that are relatively infrequent in DNA(e.g., cDNA) of one or more organisms (i.e., an infrequent cutter) areparticularly useful. In some embodiments, restriction sites RA and RBare recognizable and cleavable by a restriction endonuclease that hasrelatively infrequent restriction sites in human DNA. In someembodiments, restriction sites RA and RB are recognizable and cleavableby a restriction endonuclease that has relatively infrequent restrictionsites in mouse DNA. In some embodiments, restriction sites RA and RB arerecognizable and cleavable by a restriction endonuclease that hasrelatively infrequent restriction sites in yeast DNA, for example, inthe DNA of Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Pichia pastoris, Kluyveromyceslactis, Arxula adeninivorans, or Hansenula polymorphs. In someembodiments, restriction sites RA and RB are recognizable and cleavableby a restriction endonuclease that has relatively few restriction sitesin the DNA of bacteria, for example, in the DNA of Escherichia coli orBacillus subtilis.

In some embodiments, restriction sites RA and RB are recognizable andcleavable by a Type IIS restriction endonuclease wherein the recognitionsite is distal to the polynucleotide sequence comprising, e.g.,PA/LA-D-PB/LB. In some embodiments, each restriction site RA and RB isindependently recognizable and cleavable by a restriction endonucleaseselected from the group consisting of MssI, NruI (Bsp68I, MluB2I,Sbo13I, SpoI), SnaBI (BstSNI, Eco105I), SrfI, and SwaI (BstRZ246I,BstSWI, MspSWI, SmiI), HpaI, HincII, PshAI, OliI, AluI, Alw26I, BalI,DraI, DpnI, EcoR471II, EcoRCRI, EcoRV, FokI, HaeIII, HincII, MboI,MspAlI, NaeI, RsaI, PvuII, ScaI, SmaI, SspI, StuI, XmnI, EcaBC3I, SciI,HincII, DraI, BsaBI, Cac8I, Hpy8I, MlyI, PshAI, SspD51, BfrBI, BsaAI,BsrBI, BtrI, CdiI, CviJI, CviRI, Eco471II, Eco78I, EcoICRI, FnuDII,FspAI, HaeI, LpnI, MlyI, Ms1I, MstI, NaeI, NlaIV, NruI, NspBII, Olil,PmaCI, PshAI, PsiI, SrfI, StuI, XcaI, XmnI, ZraI, and isoschizomersthereof. In a particular embodiment, restriction sites RA and RB arerecognizable and cleavable by the SapI or LguI restriction endonuclease.LguI is an isoschizomer of SapI having the same recognition and cleavagespecificity.

In some embodiments, the entry vector provided herein also comprises oneor more nucleic acid sequences that generally have some function in thereplication, maintenance, or integrity of the vector (e.g., origins ofreplication) as well as one or more selectable markers. Replicationorigins are unique polynucleotides that comprise multiple short repeatedsequences that are recognized by multimeric origin-binding proteins andthat play a key role in assembling DNA replication enzymes at the originsite. Suitable origins of replication for use in the entry and assemblyvectors provided herein include but are not limited to E. coli oriC,colE1 plasmid origin, 2μ and ARS (both useful in yeast systems), sfl,SV40 EBV oriP (useful in mammalian systems), or those found in pSC101.Selectable markers can be useful elements in vectors as they provide ameans to select for or against growth of cells that have beensuccessfully transformed with a vector containing the selectable markerand express the marker.

In some embodiments, any vector may be used to construct the entryvector as provided herein. In particular, vectors known in the art andthose commercially available (and variants or derivatives thereof) maybe engineered to include a restriction site RA, optionally a primerbinding segment PA or an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, arestriction site RY, a DNA segment D, a restriction site RZ, optionallya primer binding segment PB or an annealable linker nucleic acidsequence LB, and a restriction site RB, for use in the methods providedherein. Such vectors may be obtained from, for example, VECTORLABORATORIES INC., INVITROGEN, PROMEGA, NOVAGEN, NEB, CLONTECH,BOEHRINGER MANNHEIM, PHARMACIA, EPICENTER, ORIGENES TECHNOLOGIES INC.,STRATAGENE, PERKIN ELMER, PHARMINGEN, LIFE TECHNOLOGIES, INC., andRESEARCH GENETICS. General classes of vectors of particular interestinclude prokaryotic and/or eukaryotic cloning vectors, expressionvectors, fusion vectors, two-hybrid or reverse two-hybrid vectors,shuttle vectors for use in different hosts, mutagenesis vectors,transcription vectors, vectors for receiving large inserts, and thelike. Other vectors of interest include viral origin vectors (M13vectors, bacterial phage λ vectors, adenovirus vectors, and retrovirusvectors), high, low and adjustable copy number vectors, vectors thathave compatible replicons for use in combination in a single host(PACYC184 and pBR322) and eukaryotic episomal replication vectors(pCDM8).

5.13 Assembly Vectors

In some embodiments, an assembly vector is a circular polynucleotidethat comprises a selectable marker, an origin of replication, and a DNAsegment flanked by an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence, anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence pair, or by an annealable linkernucleic acid sequence/primer binding segment pair, flanked by a pair ofrestriction sites. The restriction sites can serve to facilitateexcision of the component polynucleotide from the assembly vectorbackbone during the assembly reaction. Thus, in some embodiments, theassembly vector is a circular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′ to3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, a primer binding segment PA or anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, a DNA segment D, and arestriction site RB. In some embodiments, the assembly vector is acircular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, arestriction site RA, a DNA segment D, a primer binding segment PB or anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence LB, and a restriction site RB.In certain embodiments, the assembly vector is a circular polynucleotidethat comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, aprimer binding segment PA or an annealable linker nucleic acid sequenceLA, a DNA segment D, a primer binding segment PB or an annealable linkernucleic acid sequence LB, and a restriction site RB.

In some embodiments, the assembly vector is a circular polynucleotidethat comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, a DNA segment D, and arestriction site RB (i.e., 5′-RA-LA-D-RB-3′). In some embodiments, theassembly vector is a circular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′ to3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, a DNA segment D, an annealablelinker nucleic acid sequence LB, and a restriction site RB (i.e.,5′-RA-D-LB-RB-3′). In some embodiments, the assembly vector is acircular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, arestriction site RA, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, aDNA segment D, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LB, and arestriction site RB (i.e., 5′-RA-LA-D-LB-RB-3′). In some embodiments,the assembly vector is a circular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, a primer binding segment PA, aDNA segment D, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LB, and arestriction site RB (i.e., 5′-RA-PA-D-LB-RB-3′). In some embodiments,the assembly vector is a circular polynucleotide that comprises, in a 5′to 3′ orientation, a restriction site RA, an annealable linker nucleicacid sequence LA, a DNA segment D, a primer binding segment PB, and arestriction site RB (i.e., 5′-RA-LA-D-PB-RB-3′). An exemplary assemblyvector constructed from a starter vector is provided in FIG. 3B.

In preferable embodiments, the nucleic acid sequences of primer bindingsegment PA and primer binding segment PB are not identical. In someembodiments, the nucleic acid sequence of annealable linker nucleic acidsequence LA or LB is at least 24 nucleotides and has a T_(m) of at least60° C. In some embodiments, RA and RB are not identical in sequence. Insome embodiments, RA and RB are cleavable by the same restrictionendonuclease. In some embodiments, RA and RB are identical in sequence.In some embodiments, restriction sites RA and RB are cleavable by arestriction endonuclease that generates staggered ends, i.e. terminihaving a 5′ or 3′ overhang. In other embodiments, restriction sites RAand RB are cleavable by a restriction endonuclease that generates bluntends.

Although restriction sites RA and RB can be any restriction sites knownin the art, restriction sites that are relatively infrequent in DNA(e.g., cDNA) of one or more organisms (i.e., an infrequent cutter) areparticularly useful. In some embodiments, restriction sites RA and RBare recognizable and cleavable by a restriction endonuclease that hasrelatively infrequent restriction sites in human DNA. In someembodiments, restriction sites RA and RB are recognizable and cleavableby a restriction endonuclease that has relatively infrequent restrictionsites in mouse DNA. In some embodiments, restriction sites RA and RB arerecognizable and cleavable by a restriction endonuclease that hasrelatively infrequent restriction sites in yeast DNA, for example, inthe DNA of Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Pichia pastoris, Kluyveromyceslactis, Arxula adeninivorans, or Hansenula polymorphs. In someembodiments, restriction sites RA and RB are recognizable and cleavableby a restriction endonuclease that has relatively few restriction sitesin the DNA of bacteria, for example, in the DNA of Escherichia coli orBacillus subtilis.

In some embodiments, restriction sites RA and RB are recognizable andcleavable by a Type IIS restriction endonuclease. Illustrativce examplesof suitable Type IIS restriction endonucleases include but are notlimited to: MssI, NruI (Bsp68I, MluB2I, Sbo13I, SpoI), SnaBI (BstSNI,Eco105I), SrfI, and SwaI (BstRZ246I, BstSWI, MspSWI, SmiI), HpaI,HincII, PshAI, OliI, AluI, Alw26I, BalI, DraI, DpnI, EcoR471II, EcoRCRI,EcoRV, FokI, HaeIII, HincII, MboI, MspAlI, NaeI, RsaI, PvuII, ScaI,SmaI, SspI, StuI, XmnI, EcaBC3I, SciI, HincII, DraI, BsaBI, Cac8I,Hpy8I, MlyI, PshAI, SspD51, BfrBI, BsaAI, BsrBI, BtrI, CdiI, CviJI,CviRI, Eco47III, Eco78I, EcoICRI, FnuDII, FspAI, HaeI, LpnI, MlyI, MslI,MstI, NaeI, NlaIV, NruI, NspBII, OliI, PmaCI, PshAI, PsiI, SrfI, StuI,XcaI, XmnI, ZraI, or isoschizomers thereof. In a particular embodiment,restriction sites RA and RB are recognizable and cleavable by the SapIor LguI restriction endonuclease.

Preferably, the DNA segment of an assembly vector does not comprise anucleic acid sequence that can be recognized and cleaved by arestriction endonuclease that can cleave any of restriction sites RA andRB within the assembly vector. This ensures that the DNA segment remainsintact during the first stage of the assembly reaction, during which thecomponent polynucleotide is excised from the assembly vector backbone.In particular embodiments, the DNA segment does not comprise a SapI/LguIsite and RA and RB are cleavable by SapI or LguI. Site-directedmutagenesis (see Carter, Bi Chem. J. 237:1-7 (1986); Zoller and Smith,Methods Enzymol. 154:329-50 (1987)), cassette mutagenesis, restrictionselection mutagenesis (Wells et al., Gene 34:315-323 (1985)),oligonucleotide-mediated (site-directed) mutagenesis, PCR mutagenesis,or other known techniques can be performed to modify any such sequencewithin the DNA segment either before or after ligation of the DNAsegment to the entry vector.

In some embodiments, the assembly vector provided herein also comprisesone or more nucleic acid sequences that generally have some function inthe replication, maintenance, or integrity of the vector (e.g., originsof replication) as well as one or more selectable markers. Replicationorigins are unique polynucleotides that comprise multiple short repeatedsequences that are recognized by multimeric origin-binding proteins andthat play a key role in assembling DNA replication enzymes at the originsite. Suitable origins of replication for use in the entry and assemblyvectors provided herein include but are not limited to E. coli oriC,colE1 plasmid origin, 2μ and ARS (both useful in yeast systems), sfl,SV40 EBV oriP (useful in mammalian systems), or those found in pSC101.Selectable markers can be useful elements in vectors as they provide ameans to select for or against growth of cells that have beensuccessfully transformed with a vector containing the selectable markerand express the marker.

In some embodiments, any vector may be used to construct the assemblyvector as provided herein. In particular, vectors known in the art andthose commercially available (and variants or derivatives thereof) maybe engineered to include a restriction site RA, a primer binding segmentPA or an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA, a DNA segment D, aprimer binding segment PB or an annealable linker nucleic acid sequenceLB, and a restriction site RB, for use in the methods provided herein.Such vectors may be obtained from, for example, VECTOR LABORATORIESInc., INVITROGEN, PROMEGA, NOVAGEN, NEB, CLONTECH, BOEHRINGER MANNHEIM,PHARMACIA, EPICENTER, ORIGENES TECHNOLOGIES INC., STRATAGENE, PERKINELMER, PHARMINGEN, LIFE TECHNOLOGIES, INC., and RESEARCH GENETICS.General classes of vectors of particular interest include prokaryoticand/or eukaryotic cloning vectors, expression vectors, fusion vectors,two-hybrid or reverse two-hybrid vectors, shuttle vectors for use indifferent hosts, mutagenesis vectors, transcription vectors, vectors forreceiving large inserts, and the like. Other vectors of interest includeviral origin vectors (M13 vectors, bacterial phage λ vectors, adenovirusvectors, and retrovirus vectors), high, low and adjustable copy numbervectors, vectors that have compatible replicons for use in combinationin a single host (PACYC184 and pBR322) and eukaryotic episomalreplication vectors (pCDM8).

An assembly vector can be prepared from an entry vector. Entry vectorsare disclosed in Section 5.12 above. To prepare an assembly vector froman entry vector, the entry vector can be digested with one or morerestriction endonucleases capable of cleaving RY and RZ therebylinearizing the vector such that it can accept a DNA segment. The DNAsegment can be ligated into RY and RZ sites using standard cloningtechniques to generate an assembly vector of the invention. For example,the DNA segment may be obtained by standard procedures known in the artfrom cloned DNA (e.g., a DNA “library”), by chemical synthesis, by cDNAcloning, or by the cloning of genomic DNA, or fragments thereof,purified from the desired cell, or by PCR amplification and cloning.See, for example, Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A LaboratoryManual, 3d. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold SpringHarbor, N.Y. (2001); Glover, D. M. (ed.), DNA Cloning: A PracticalApproach, 2d. ed., MRL Press, Ltd., Oxford, U.K. (1995).

An assembly vector can also be prepared from another vector that doesnot comprise an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence, an annealablelinker nucleic acid sequence pair, or an annealable linker nucleic acidsequence/primer binding segment pair flanking the site of insertion ofthe DNA segment. To prepare an assembly vector from such a vector, thevector can be digested with one or more restriction endonucleasescapable of cleaving the vector at a site suitable for insertion of a DNAfragment, e.g., at a multiple cloning site, thereby linearizing thevector such that it can accept a DNA fragment. The DNA fragment to beinserted can be obtained by standard procedures known in the art suchas, for example, cloning, chemical synthesis, or PCR amplification. TheDNA fragment comprises a DNA segment flanked by an annealable linkernucleic acid sequence, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence pairor an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence/primer binding segmentpair. Thus, in some embodiments, the DNA fragment comprises, in a 5′ to3′ orientation, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LA or aprimer binding segment PA, a DNA segment D, and an annealable linkernucleic acid sequence LB or a primer binding segment PB (i.e.,5′-LA-D-LB-3′ or 5′-PA-D-LB-3′ or 5′-LA-D-PB-3′). In some embodiments,the DNA fragment comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a DNA segment D,and an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence LB or a primer bindingsegment PB (i.e., 5′-D-LB-3′ or 5′-D-PB-3′). In some embodiments, theDNA fragment comprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, an annealable linkernucleic acid sequence LA or a primer binding segment PA, and a DNAsegment D, (i.e., 5′-LA-D-3′ or 5′-PA-D-3′). The DNA fragment canfurther comprise a pair of restriction sites that flank the annealablelinker nucleic acid sequence, the annealable linker nucleic acidsequence pair or the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence/primerbinding segment pair and that upon cleavage by a restrictionendonuclease produce termini that are compatible with termini producedby linearising the vector into which the DNA fragment is to be inserted.Alternatively, the DNA fragment can generated such that it contains suchcompatible termini and does not require additional digestion with arestriction endonuclease to produce the compatible termini. Uponligation of the DNA fragment with the linearized vector to generate anassembly vector, the restriction sites used to generate the compatibletermini may be preserved to serve as restriction sites RA and RB of theassembly vector. Alternatively, the ligation may remove the originalrestriction sites but additional restriction sites may be present in thelinearised vector that can serve as restriction sites RA and RB of theassembly vector.

Exemplary methods for generating an assembly vector from an entry vector(i.e., a pRYSE vector) or from another vector (i.e., a pMULE vector) areprovided in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No.2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009, which is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety

5.14 Annealable Linker Nucleic Acid Sequences

In another aspect, provided herein are annealable linker nucleic acidsequences that flank the DNA segment located within entry vectors andassembly vectors. Annealable linker nucleic acid sequences providesequence overlap between adjacent component polynucleotides in anassembly reaction, and thus serve to prime a component polynucleotidefor assembly into an assembled polynucleotide. Thus, in preferredembodiments, the annealable linker nucleic acid sequences LA and LB ofthe entry and assembly vectors are optimized to provide efficient andaccurate priming to complementary annealable linker nucleic acidsequences during an assembly reaction.

In some embodiments, the length of an annealable linker nucleic acidsequence is long enough to provide adequate specificity with itscomplement annealable linker nucleic acid sequence, yet short enough toreadily anneal to its complement annealable linker nucleic acid sequenceat the annealing temperature of the assembly reaction. In someembodiments the length of an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence islong enough to allow for host cell mediated homologous recombinationwith its complement annealable linker nucleic acid sequence.

In some embodiments, the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence isabout 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, or 80nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the annealable linkernucleic acid sequence is at least 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26,28, or 30 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the anealablelinker nucleic acid sequence is greater than 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100, 500, 1000, 5000, or 10,000 nucleotides in length. In someembodiments, the annealable linker is at least 18 nucleotides in lengthand is a number divisible by three, so as to facilitate read-throughtranscription of the linker when ligated to an encoding DNA segment. Inparticular embodiments, the annealable linker is 18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33,36, 39, 42, 45, 48, 51, 54, 57, or 60 nucleotides in length.

In some embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence has arelatively high melting temperature (T_(m)), i.e., the temperature atwhich one half of an annealed annealable linker nucleic acid sequenceduplex will dissociate to become single stranded. The T_(m) of anannealable linker can be calculated according to SantaLucia, PNAS,95:-1460-1465 (1998) using a nearest neighbor algorithm. A relativelyhigh T_(m) may provide for more specific priming during an assemblyreaction. A relatively high T_(m) may also allow combination of theannealing and extension steps of PCR or reduce the amount of time neededto adjust temperatures between the annealing and extension steps of PCRand thus enable greater efficiency in using the assembly methods of theinvention. Thus, in some embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acidsequence duplex has a T_(m) of about 60° C. 80° C. In some embodiments,an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence duplex has a T_(m) of about65° C.-75° C. In some embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acidsequence duplex has a T_(m) of greater than 50° C., 55° C., 60° C., 65°C., 70° C., 75° C., 80° C., 85° C., or 90° C.

In some embodiments, annealable linker nucleic acid sequences do notform appreciable secondary structures (e.g., hairpins, self-dimers)produced via intramolecular (i.e., within the same molecule)interactions under the conditions of the methods described herein,either at the DNA level or at the RNA level or at both the DNA and theRNA level. The presence of secondary structures in DNA can lead to pooror no assembled polynucleotide yield of the assembly reaction. Thepresence of secondary structures in RNA can lead to decreasedtranslation efficiencies, which are of particular concern when theannealable linker nucleic acid sequence is used to assemble componentpolynucleotides comprising a promoter and a protein coding sequence incoa assembled polynucleotide in which the annealable linker nucleic acidsequence is positioned between the promoter and the protein codingsequence. Accordingly, annealable linker nucleic acid sequences usefulin the assembly methods of the present disclosure are designed to notform secondary RNA and/or DNA structures. The ability of an annealablelinker nucleic acid sequence to form secondary RNA or DNA structures canbe determined using software tools such as, for example, IDT OligoAnalyzer (Integrated DNA Technologies, Coralville, Iowa), mFold (Zuker2003 Nucleic Acids Res. 31 (13), 3406-15), or RNAfold (Hofacker &Stadler (2006) Bioinformatics 22 (10): 1172-6). In general, these toolscalculate the Gibbs free energy (ΔG) for transition of a sequence fromthe linear to the folded state. The larger ΔG, the less likely that thesequence will form a secondary structure. Accordingly, in someembodiments, annealable linker nucleic acid sequences are designed tohave large ΔG values for the transition from linear to folded states. Insome embodiments, annealable linker nucleic acid sequences are designedto have ΔG values for the transition from linear to folded states thatare equal to or greater than the ΔG values for the transition fromlinear to folded states of the n-bases that lie immediately upstream ofthe coding sequences of highly expressed genes in the Saccharomycescerevisiae genome, where n represents an integer that corresponds to thenumber of bases in the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence. In someembodiments, annealable linker nucleic acid sequences are 36 bases longand have a AG value for the transition from linear to folded states of−1 or greater.

In some embodiments, annealable linker nucleic acid sequences are alsodesigned to avoid unintended intermolecular interactions (e.g., betweendifferent molecules). Thus, in some embodiments, an annealable linkernucleic acid sequence does not anneal substantially with any othersequences within the assembly vector that contains the annealable linkernucleic acid sequence (e.g., vector backbone sequences) and/or with anyother sequences within other assembly vectors of the assemblycompositions aside from the complementary annealable linker nucleic acidsequences required for polynucleotide assembly by the methods providedherein. In some embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequencedoes not anneal substantially with other annealable linker nucleic acidsequences within assembly vectors of the assembly compositions providedherein.

In some embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence has ahigh G-C content, i.e., the number of guanine and cytosine nucleotidesin the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence as a percentage of thetotal number of bases in the annealable linker nucleic acid sequenceAnnealable linker nucleic acid sequences that have a high G-C contentare generally useful in the methods of the invention because a high G-Ccontent generally provides for a high T_(m), which in turn may providefor more specific priming during an assembly reaction and for time andprocess savings by allowing combination of the annealing and extensionsteps of SOE/PCR. In some embodiments, the G-C content of the annealablelinker nucleic acid sequence is between about 20-80%. In someembodiments, the G-C content of the annenalable linker nucleic acidsequence is between about 40-60%. In some embodiments, the G-C contentof the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence is about 40, 45, 50, 55,60, or 70%. In particular embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acidsequence has a G-C content of greater than 70%. Illustrative examples ofannealable linker nucleic acid sequences that have a high G-C content,do not form appreciable secondary DNA structures, and have a T_(m) of70° C. or greater are generally disclosed in U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No. 2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009,which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, including SEQID NOS: 1 to 8 filed therein.

In some embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence has ahigh A-T content, i.e., the number of adenine and thymine nucleotides inthe annealable linker nucleic acid sequence as a percentage of the totalnumber of bases in the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence. A highA-T content may provide for reduced propensity of the annealable linkernucleic acid sequence to form substantial secondary structures, whichmay be of particular concern when the annealable linker nucleic acidsequence is used to assemble component polynucleotides comprising apromoter and a protein coding sequence into a assembled polynucleotidein which the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence is positionedbetween the promoter and the protein coding sequence. In someembodiments, the A-T content of the annealable linker nucleic acidsequence is between about 20-80%. In some embodiments, the A-T contentof the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence is between about 40-60%.In some embodiments, the A-T content of the annealable linker nucleicacid sequence is about 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, or 60%. In someembodiments, the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence has an A-Tcontent of greater than 30%. Illustrative examples of annealable linkernucleic acid sequences that comprise a preferred consensus motif, have arelatively high A-T content, do not form appreciable secondary RNA orDNA structures, and have a T_(m) of 65° C. or greater are generallydisclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/622,401 (Pub. No.2010/0136633 A1), filed Nov. 19, 2009, which is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety, including SEQ ID NOS: 9 to 23 filed therein.

In some embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequencecomprises one or more restriction sites. Incorporation of restrictionsites into an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence allows for theexcision of a DNA segment from an entry or assembly vector whilemaintaining the restriction sites RA and RB within the entry vector orassembly vector. Restriction sites within the annealable linker nucleicacid sequence also facilitate directional subcloning of DNA segmentsinto other entry or assembly vectors. This feature facilitates theefficient construction of assembly vectors comprising the same DNAsegment but having different annealable linker nucleic acid sequencepairs or primer binding segment/annealable linker nucleic acid sequencepairs, for instance, to generate a library of assembly vectorscomprising different annealable linker nucleic acid sequence pairs asdescribed below. This feature can also obviate the need to re-amplifyand sequence a DNA segment to create additional assembly vectorscomprising the DNA segment. Thus, in some embodiments, the annealablelinker nucleic acid sequence comprises a unique restriction site. Insome embodiments, the restriction site is a 7-base pair restrictionsite, i.e., is cleavable by a restriction endonuclease that recognizes a7-base pair nucleotide sequence. In some embodiments, the restrictionsite is a 8-base pair restriction site. In particular embodiments, therestriction site within the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence isrecognized and cleavable by MreI, FseI, SbfI, AsiSI, NotI, AscI, orBbvCI.

In some embodiments, the annealable linker nucleic acid sequencecomprises a sequence that allows for read-through transcription once thelinker is ligated to an encoding DNA segment. In some embodiments, anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence allows for read-throughtranscription in both the 5′ to 3′ and 3′ to 5′ orientation. In theseembodiments, the length of the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence,preferably, is a number of nucleotides divisible by three (3).

In particular embodiments, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequencedoes not comprise codons that are rarely used in Escherichia coli (E.coli) or Saccharomyces cerevisiae (S. cerevisiae). Efficient expressionof heterologous genes in E. coli or S. cerevisiae can be adverselyaffected by the presence of infrequently used codons, and expressionlevels of the heterologous protein often rise when rare codons arereplaced by more common ones. See, e.g., Williams et al., Nucleic AcidsRes. 16: 10453-10467, 1988 and Hoog et al., Gene 43: 13-21, 1986.Accordingly, an annealable linker nucleic acid sequence that comprises aread-through sequence preferably does not comprise rare codons used inE. coli or S. cerevisiae, so as to enable efficient expression ofproteins encoded by a assembled polynucleotide comprising the annealablelinker nucleic acid sequence.

In some embodiments, the set of annealable linker nucleic acid sequencesare unique sequences that are not found in an intended host organism. Insome embodiments, the set of annealable linker nucleic acid sequencesare unique sequences that are not found in E. coli. In otherembodiments, the set of annealable linker nucleic acid sequences areunique sequences that are not found in S. cerevisiase.

In some embodiments, suitable annealable linker nucleic acid sequencesare identified in a test assembled polynucleotide. A test assembledpolynucleotide comprises the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence tobe tested and additional elements that permit testing of the annealablelinker nucleic acid sequence. For example, to test whether an annealablelinker is suitable for assembling a first component polynucleotidecomprising a promoter sequence and a second component polynucleotidecomprising a protein coding sequence to be put under the control of thepromoter in the assembled polynucleotide, a test assembledpolynucleotide can be assembled from the first component polynucleotidecomprising, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, a primer binding segment or anannealable linker nucleic acid sequence, a DNA segment comprising thepromoter, and the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence to be tested,and the second component polynucleotide comprising, in a 5′ to 3′orientation, the annealable linker nucleic acid sequence to be tested, aDNA segment encoding a reporter gene (e.g., green fluourescent protein(GFP)), and a primer binding segment or annealable linker nucleic acidsequence. The test assembled polynucleotide can be tested in vivo or invitro for the efficiency of expression of the reporter gene. Similartest assembled polynucleotides can be assembled to test the suitabilityof annealable linker nucleic acid sequences for assembling componentpolynucleotides comprising DNA segments comprising other elements, suchas an enhancer, terminator, poly-A tail, nuclear localization signal,mRNA stabilization signal, selectable marker, epitope tag codingsequence, degradation signal, and the like. The test assembledpolynucleotide may comprise additional component polynucleotides thatenable testing, such as for example, genomic targeting sequences andselectable markers that enable introduction of the test assembledpolynucleotide into host cells and selection of positive transformantsfor in vivo testing.

6. INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

All publications, patents and patent applications cited in thisspecification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individualpublication or patent application were specifically and individuallyindicated to be incorporated by reference. Although the foregoinginvention has been described in some detail by way of illustration andexample for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be readilyapparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachingsof this invention that certain changes and modifications can be madethereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appendedclaims. The embodiments of the present invention described above areintended to be merely exemplary, and those skilled in the art willrecognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routineexperimentation, numerous equivalents to the specific proceduresdescribed herein. All such equivalents are considered to be within thescope of the present invention and are covered by the following claims.Furthermore, as used in this specification and claims, the singularforms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural forms unless the contentclearly dictates otherwise.

1. A method of defining an engineered nucleic acid construct forintegration into a genomic locus L of a target organism or a host cell,the method comprising: (A) receiving a plurality of nucleic acidrequests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, wherein n is a positive integer greaterthan 1, each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifying a genetic change to L; (B) expanding each NR_(i) in {NR₁, . .. , NR_(n)} into a corresponding component polynucleotide, therebyforming a plurality of component polynucleotides; (C) arranging theplurality of component polynucleotides into a contiguous arrangementAR_(i), wherein the arranging uses linker nucleic acid sequences tocombine component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides into the contiguous arrangement AR_(i); (D) repeatingthe arranging (C) until a set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} contiguousarrangements are formed, wherein m is a positive integer greater than 1,the set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} contiguous arrangements representing aplurality of different contiguous arrangements of the componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides; (E)determining a score S_(i) for each respective contiguous arrangementAR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, wherein, for each respective contiguousarrangement AR_(i), a contribution to the score S_(i) is made when oneor more source constructs are identified as being physically present ina freezer store, wherein each of the one or more physically presentsource constructs encodes one or more of the component polynucleotides,and wherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of eachrespective component polynucleotide in the one or more componentpolynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically present sourceconstructs is bound to a corresponding linker nucleic acid sequence thatwas used for the corresponding component polynucleotide in the arranging(C) to form the AR_(i); (F) selecting a final contiguous arrangementAR_(f) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} having a score S_(i) that meets aselection criterion as an optimal contiguous arrangement; and (G)calculating, in response to selection of the AR_(f), one or more primerpairs based upon the AR_(f), wherein each primer pair in the one or moreprimer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion of the AR_(f) notrepresented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(f), wherein the portions of the contiguousarrangement AR_(f) amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the oneor more component polynucleotides in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for the AR_(f), in the order specified inthe AR_(f), collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct,wherein at least one of the receiving (A), expanding (B), arranging (C),repeating (D), determining (E), selecting (F), and calculating (G) isperformed using one or more suitably programmed computers.
 2. The methodof claim 1, wherein the arranging (C) comprises inserting a selectablemarker having a nucleic acid sequence into the contiguous arrangementAR_(i), and the set of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}represents a plurality of different contiguous arrangements of thecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotidesand the selectable marker with respect to each other.
 3. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the score S_(i) for each respective AR_(i) is afunction of a number of component polynucleotides already arrangedaccording to the contiguous arrangement specified by AR_(i) in the oneor more physically present constructs selected by AR_(i) by thedetermining (E).
 4. The method of claim 1, wherein a nucleic acidrequest in the plurality of nucleic acid requests specifies insertion ofan insertion sequence at L.
 5. The method of claim 4, wherein theinsertion sequence comprises a promoter and a gene to be expressed bythe promoter.
 6. The method of claim 4, wherein the insertion sequencecomprises a divergent promoter and a first gene and a second gene drivenby the divergent promoter.
 7. The method of claim 6, wherein thedivergent promoter is a back-to-back divergent promoter, an overlappingdivergent promoter, or a face-to-face divergent promoter.
 8. The methodof claim 4, wherein the insertion sequence comprises a promoter, a gene,a terminator, an open reading frame, a codon substitution, a nucleicacid substitution, a point mutation, an insertion mutation, or adeletion mutation.
 9. The method of claim 4, wherein the insertionsequence comprises a fusable open reading frame without a stop codon.10. The method of claim 4, wherein the nucleic acid request specifiesthat the entire genomic locus L is to be replaced by the insertionsequence.
 11. The method of claim 4, wherein the nucleic acid requestspecifies that a promoter and a gene at L is to be replaced by theinsertion sequence.
 12. The method of claim 4, wherein the nucleic acidrequest specifies that a divergent promoter and a first gene and asecond gene driven by the divergent promoter at L is to be replaced bythe insertion sequence.
 13. The method of claim 12, wherein thedivergent promoter is a back-to-back divergent promoter, an overlappingdivergent promoter, or a face-to-face divergent promoter.
 14. The methodof claim 4, wherein the nucleic acid request specifies that a promoter,a gene, a terminator, an open reading frame, a codon substitution, anucleic acid substitution, a point mutation, an insertion mutation, or adeletion mutation at L is to be replaced by the insertion sequence. 15.The method of claim 4, wherein the nucleic acid request specifies that afusible open reading frame without a stop codon is to be replaced by theinsertion sequence.
 16. The method of claim 4, wherein the insertionsequence includes a first copy of a gene in a 3′ to 5′ orientation and asecond copy of the gene in a 5′ to 3′ orientation, and a bi-directionalpromoter between the first copy and the second copy.
 17. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the arranging (C) comprises barring an AR_(i) thatwould cause a repeat sequence of greater than a predetermined number ofbases to arise in the engineered nucleic acid construct.
 18. The methodof claim 1, wherein the calculating (G) comprises applying at least onedesign rule to identify primers in the one or more primer pairs.
 19. Themethod of claim 18, wherein the at least one design rule is (i)avoidance of hair pin termini, (ii) avoidance of self-dimerization,(iii) primer length between 17 and 28 bases, (iv) percent G+C contentbetween fifty and sixty percent, (v) melting temperature between 55° C.and 80° C., or (vi) avoidance of runs of three or more Cs or Gs at the3′ terminus.
 20. The method of claim 1, wherein a first componentpolynucleotide is identical to a second component polynucleotide in theplurality of component polynucleotides and wherein the arranging (C)comprises barring a contiguous arrangement that would cause the firstcomponent polynucleotide and the second component polynucleotide to runin the same direction in the engineered nucleic acid construct.
 21. Themethod of claim 2, wherein an identity of the selectable marker isreceived with the plurality of nucleic acid requests in the receiving(A).
 22. The method of claim 2, wherein an identity of the selectablemarker is determined without human intervention from a predeterminedlist of selectable markers by the arranging (C).
 23. The method of claim1, wherein the calculating (G) comprises encoding a linker nucleic acidsequence specified for contiguous arrangement AR_(f) by the arranging(C) into a primer in the one or more primer pairs calculated for AR_(f).24. The method of claim 1, wherein the expanding (B) comprises expandinga first nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into a firstcomponent polynucleotide and a second component polynucleotide, whereinthe first component polynucleotide is a promoter and the secondcomponent polynucleotide is a gene.
 25. The method of claim 1, whereinthe determining (E) comprises determining whether a source constructhaving all or a subset of the plurality of component polynucleotides, inthe contiguous order specified by the contiguous arrangement AR_(i), ispresent in the freezer store, and a contribution the source constructmakes to the score S_(i) for the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) isdependent upon a number of component polynucleotides in the sourceconstruct that are in the contiguous order specified by the contiguousarrangement AR_(i).
 26. The method of claim 1, wherein each sourceconstruct in the freezer store comprises a linker nucleic acid sequence,selected from a predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequences,bound to a 3′ end or a 5′ end of a component polynucleotide.
 27. Themethod of claim 1, wherein the determining (E) comprises identifying afirst source construct in the freezer store, the first source constructhaving a first subset of the plurality of component polynucleotides, inthe contiguous order specified by the contiguous arrangement AR_(i), thedetermining (E) comprises identifying a second source construct in thefreezer store, the second source construct having a second subset of theplurality of component polynucleotides, in the contiguous orderspecified by the contiguous arrangement AR_(i), there is no overlapbetween the first subset and the second subset, a first contribution tothe score S_(i) for the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) is based upon anumber of component polynucleotides in the first source construct thatare in the contiguous order specified by the contiguous arrangementAR_(i), and a second contribution to the score S_(i) for the contiguousarrangement AR_(i) is based upon a number of component polynucleotidesin the second source construct that are in the contiguous orderspecified by the contiguous arrangement AR_(i).
 28. The method of claim1, wherein: the determining (E) comprises identifying a set of {C₁, . .. , C_(q)} source constructs in the freezer store, wherein q is apositive integer greater than 1, for a contiguous arrangement Ar_(i) inthe set of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, eachrespective source construct C_(i) in {C₁, . . . , C_(q)} having acorresponding subset S_(i) of component polynucleotides in the pluralityof component polynucleotides, in the contiguous order specified by thecontiguous arrangement Ar_(i), wherein the corresponding subset S_(i) ofcomponent polynucleotides is not found in any other source construct in{C₁, . . . , C_(q)}, and a contribution to the score S_(i) for AR_(i)from each respective C_(i) in {C₁, . . . , C_(q)} is based upon a numberof component polynucleotides in C_(i) that are in a contiguous orderspecified by AR_(i).
 29. The method of claim 1, wherein the freezerstore comprises 1000 source constructs.
 30. The method of claim 1,wherein the freezer store comprises 10,000 source constructs.
 31. Themethod of claim 1, wherein the plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR₁,. . . , NR_(n)} comprises between 2 and 12 nucleic acid requests. 32.The method of claim 1, wherein a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} specifies a point mutation in a gene at genomic locus L andwherein the expanding (B) obtains a nucleic acid sequence of the geneand modifies the nucleic acid sequence of the gene to form a componentpolynucleotide in the plurality of component polynucleotides.
 33. Themethod of claim 1, wherein a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} is a request that an exogenous gene be inserted at L, andwherein the expanding (B) comprises obtaining a sequence of theexogenous gene from a database of nucleic acid sequences to form acomponent polynucleotide in the plurality of component polynucleotides.34. The method of claim 2, wherein the engineered nucleic acid constructcomprises a first PCR product having a first part of the selectablemarker and a second PCR product, having a second part of the selectablemarker, wherein the first PCR product, running in the 5′ to 3′direction, combines with the second PCR product, running in the 3′ to 5′direction, to form the engineered nucleic acid construct with theselectable marker.
 35. The method of claim 1, wherein, for eachrespective nucleic acid component in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides, the arranging (C) comprises incorporating a firstlinker nucleic acid sequence from a predetermined library of linkernucleic acid sequences at or near a 5′ end of the respective componentpolynucleotide and a second linker nucleic acid sequence from apredetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequences at or near the 3′end of the respective component polynucleotide, thereby forming abounded component polynucleotide; and the determining (E) comprisescomputing a score S_(i) for each respective contiguous arrangementAR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} based on a number of bounded componentpolynucleotides in the respective contiguous arrangement AR_(i) that arein the freezer store in the order specified by the contiguousarrangement AR_(i).
 36. The method of claim 1, wherein the engineerednucleic acid construct comprises a first integration sequence and asecond integration sequence for L, the method further comprising:synthesizing the engineered nucleic acid construct; and contacting theengineered nucleic acid construct with the genome of the target organismor host cell under conditions suitable for homologous recombination,thereby achieving the plurality of {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} nucleic acidrequests at L.
 37. The method of claim 1, wherein the linker nucleicacid sequences are selected from a predetermined library of linkernucleic acid sequences consisting of 100 linker nucleic acid sequencesor less.
 38. The method of claim 1, wherein the linker nucleic acidsequences are selected from a predetermined library of linker nucleicacid sequences consisting of 50 linker nucleic acid sequences or less.39. The method of claim 1, wherein a contiguous arrangement AR_(i) inthe set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} contiguous arrangements comprises, in a5′ to 3′ orientation,A=an ordered set {X₁, . . . ,X_(t)}, wherein, t is a positive integergreater than 1, each i is an integer in the set of integers {1, . . . ,t}, each X_(i) comprises 5′-LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i)-3′, each LB_(i) is alinker nucleic acid sequence in the selected from a predeterminedlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences, each NA_(i) is a componentpolynucleotide in the plurality of component polynucleotides, eachLB_(i) for i less than t, upon denaturation to single stranded form, iscapable of hybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1), thereby forming anucleic acid construct comprising the nucleic acid sequence: 5′-LA₁-NA₁,. . . , LB_(n−1)-NA_(n)-LB_(n)-3′.
 40. The method of claim 40, whereinthe contiguous arrangement AR_(i) further comprises:B=NA₀-LB₀, andC=LA_(t+1)-NA_(t+1), wherein LB₀ is a linker nucleic acid sequenceselected from a predetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequences,NA₀ and NA_(t+1) are each component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides, the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) comprising,in a 5′ to 3′ orientation,A,B,C, and wherein LB₀, upon denaturation to single stranded form, iscapable of hybridizing to the complement of LA₁, and LB_(t), upondenaturation to single stranded form, is capable of hybridizing to thecomplement of LA_(t+1), so that the nucleic acid construct comprises thenucleic acid sequence: 5′-NA₀-LB_(O), . . . ,LB_(t−1)-NA_(t)-LB_(t)-NA_(t+1)-3′.
 41. The method of claim 39, whereinthe determining (E) comprises determining whether a source construct inthe freezer store comprises an X_(i) in the ordered set {X₁, . . . ,X_(t)}.
 42. The method of claim 39, wherein the determining (E)comprises determining whether a source construct in the freezer storecomprises a plurality of X_(i) in a contiguous order specified by theordered set {X₁, . . . , X_(t)}.
 43. The method of claim 39, wherein,upon denaturation of X_(i) in A, each LB_(i), for i less than t, iscapable of selectively hybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1)compared to each other linker nucleic acid sequence LA_(y) or LB_(y), ortheir complements, in A, wherein each y is an integer, other than i, inthe set of integers {1, . . . , t}.
 44. The method of claim 39, whereinan LA_(i) or an LB_(i) of an X_(i) in A is at least 24 nucleotides inlength and has a melting temperature of at least 60° C.
 45. The methodof claim 1, wherein a contiguous arrangement AR_(i) in the set of {AR₁,. . . , AR_(m)} contiguous arrangements comprises, in a 5′ to 3′orientation,D=an ordered set {Q₁, . . . ,Q_(a)}. wherein, a is a positive integergreater than 1, each i is an integer in the set of integers {1, . . . ,a}, each Q_(i) comprises 5′-RA_(i)-LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i)-RB_(i)-3′, eachLB_(i) is a linker nucleic acid sequence selected from a predeterminedlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences, each NA_(i) is a componentpolynucleotide in the plurality of component polynucleotides, and eachLB_(i), for i less than a, upon denaturation to single stranded form andupon cleavage of each restriction site RA_(i) and RB_(i), is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1), thereby forming theengineered nucleic acid construct comprising the nucleic acid sequence:5′-LA₁-NA₁, . . . , LB_(a−1)-NA_(a)-LB_(a)-3′.
 46. The method of claim45, wherein each restriction site RA_(i) and each restriction siteRB_(i) is independently cleavable by one or more type IIS restrictionendonucleases, wherein each of restriction site RA_(i) and eachrestriction site RB_(i) is oriented so that cleavage of a respectiverestriction site RA_(i) and a respective restriction site RB_(i)separates their recognition and cleavage sites from the resultingnucleic acid molecule LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i).
 47. The method of claim 45,wherein the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) further comprises:E=RA₀-NA₀-LB₀-RB₀, andF=RA_(a+1)-LA_(a+1)-NA_(a+1)-RB_(a+1), wherein LB₀ is a linker nucleicacid sequence selected from a predetermined library of linker nucleicacid sequences, restriction sites RA₀, RB₀, RA_(a+1) and RB_(a+1) areeach independently cleavable by one or more type IIS restrictionendonucleases, restriction sites RA₀ and RB₀ are oriented so thatcleavage of RA₀ and RB₀ separates their respective recognition andcleavage sites from the resulting nucleic acid molecule that comprisesNA₀-LB₀, restriction sites RA_(a+1) and RB_(a+1) are oriented so thatcleavage of RA_(a+1) and RB_(a+1) separates their respective recognitionand cleavage sites from the resulting nucleic acid molecule thatcomprises NA_(a+1) LB_(a+1), and NA₀ and NA_(a+1) are each componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides, thecontiguous arrangement AR_(i) comprising, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation,D,E,F, and wherein LB₀, upon denaturation to single stranded form andupon cleavage of RB₀, is capable of hybridizing to the complement ofLA₁, and LB_(n), upon denaturation to single stranded form and uponcleavage of RB_(a), is capable of hybridizing to the complement ofLA_(a+1), so that the nucleic acid construct comprises the nucleic acidsequence: 5′-NA₀-LB₀, . . . , LB_(a−i)-NA_(a)-LB_(a)-NA_(a+1)-3′. 48.The method of claim 45, wherein the determining (E) comprisesdetermining whether a source construct in the freezer store comprises aQ_(i) in the ordered set {Q_(i), . . . , Q_(a)}.
 49. The method of claim45, wherein the determining (E) comprises determining whether a sourceconstruct in the freezer store comprises a plurality of Q_(i) in acontiguous order specified by the ordered set {Q₁, . . . , Q_(a)}. 50.The method of claim 45 wherein, upon denaturation of Q_(i) in D and uponcleavage of each restriction site RA_(i) and RB_(i) in D, each LB_(i),for i less than a, is capable of selectively hybridizing to thecomplement of LA_(i+1) compared to each of the other linker nucleic acidsequences LA_(y) or LB_(y), or their complements, in D, wherein each yis an integer, other than i, in the set of integers {1, . . . , a}. 51.The method of claim 45, wherein an LA_(i) or an LB_(i) in a Q_(i) in Dis at least 24 nucleotides in length and has a melting temperature of atleast 60° C.
 52. The method of claim 45, wherein each RA_(i) and eachRB_(i) in Q is cleavable by SapI or LguI restriction endonuclease. 53.The method of claim 1, wherein a source construct in the one or morephysically present source constructs is circular.
 54. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the set of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)} consists of each possible unique complete contiguous arrangementof the component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides.
 55. The method of claim 1, wherein the set ofcontiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} consists of a randomizedsubset of all possible unique complete contiguous arrangements of thecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides.56. The method of claim 1, wherein a nucleic acid request references agene that is to be mutated, deleted from, or integrated in L and whereinthe expanding (B) comprises validating that the gene exists in anelectronic gene database.
 57. The method of claim 1, wherein theexpanding (B) comprises obtaining a nucleic acid segment specified by anucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} from an electronicdatabase of nucleic acid sequences and incorporating the nucleic acidsegment into the component polynucleotide associated with the nucleicacid request NR_(i).
 58. The method of claim 57, wherein the nucleicacid segment is a portion of a gene, a promoter, a terminator, or agene.
 59. The method of claim 1, wherein the nucleic acid request NR_(i)specifies a nucleic acid segment having an approximate start point or anapproximate end point and wherein the expanding (B) defines an exactstart point or an exact endpoint for the nucleic acid segment forincorporation into a component polynucleotide corresponding to NR_(i)based on one or more endpoint selection criteria.
 60. The method ofclaim 59, wherein an endpoint selection criterion in the one or moreendpoint selection criteria is avoiding low complexity DNA sequence oravoiding a restriction site.
 61. The method of claim 1, wherein theexpanding (B) comprises: obtaining a nucleic acid segment specified by anucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, and inverting thenucleic acid segment relative to a naturally occurring orientation ofthe nucleic acid segment prior to incorporation of the nucleic acidsegment into a component polynucleotide associated with the nucleic acidrequest NR_(i).
 62. The method of claim 1, wherein a nucleic acidrequest NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifies an inline sequence tobe incorporated into a component polynucleotide corresponding to NR_(i)during said expanding (B).
 63. The method of claim 1, wherein thegenetic change in a nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifies a nucleic acid segment within a gene that is to be rewrittenwith one or more synonymous codons before incorporation into thecomponent polynucleotide corresponding to NR_(i) during said expanding(B).
 64. The method of claim 63, wherein the genetic change in thenucleic acid request specifies that the nucleic acid segment is to berewritten, before incorporation into the component polynucleotide, withsynonymous codons so that the nucleic acid segment is maximallydissimilar relative to a naturally occurring instance of the nucleicacid segment.
 65. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality ofnucleic acid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} is in a data inputconstruct, and wherein the data input construct further comprises one ormore pragmas to be used in performing the expanding (B), arranging (C)or calculating (G).
 66. The method of claim 65, wherein a pragma in theone or more pragmas specifies a predetermined library of linker nucleicacid sequences.
 67. The method of claim 65, wherein a pragma in the oneor more pragmas specifies whether the engineered nucleic acid constructis: (i) a single construct or, (ii) a two part construct comprising afirst PCR product having a first part of a selectable marker and asecond PCR product, having a second part of the selectable marker,wherein the first PCR product, running in the 5′ to 3′ direction,combines with the second PCR product, running in the 3′ to 5′ direction,to form the engineered nucleic acid construct with the selectablemarker.
 68. The method of claim 65, wherein a pragma in the one or morepragmas specifies a selectable marker having a nucleic acid sequence tobe incorporated into each contiguous arrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)}.
 69. The method of claim 65, wherein a pragma is between a firstnucleic acid request and a second nucleic acid request in the data inputconstruct and wherein the pragma directs the arranging (C) to not placea linker nucleic acid sequence between a first component polynucleotidespecified by the first nucleic acid request and a second componentpolynucleotide specified by the second nucleic acid request in eachcontiguous arrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}.
 70. The methodof claim 69, wherein the first component polynucleotide comprises apromoter and the second component polynucleotide comprises a gene. 71.The method of claim 65, wherein a pragma in the one or more pragmasspecifies a reference genome to be used by the expanding (B) to generatethe corresponding component polynucleotide for a nucleic acid request in{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}.
 72. The method of claim 1, wherein the selectioncriterion is a score that is higher than the score S_(i) of any othercontiguous arrangement AR_(i) in {AR_(i), . . . , AR_(m)}.
 73. Themethod of claim 1, wherein the selection criterion is a score that islower than the score S_(i) of any other contiguous arrangement AR_(i) in{AR_(i), . . . , AR_(m)}.
 74. The method of claim 1, wherein theselection criterion is identification of the first AR_(i) in {AR_(i), .. . , AR_(m)} to have a score that exceeds a predetermined threshold.75. The method of claim 1, wherein the selection criterion isidentification of the first AR_(i) in {AR_(i), . . . , AR_(m)} to have ascore that is less than a predetermined threshold.
 76. The method ofclaim 1, the method comprising outputting the nucleic acid construct toa tangible memory or a computer monitor.
 77. The method of claim 1,wherein the expanding (B) iterates between (i) expansion of {NR₁, . . ., NR_(n)} to a parse tree and (ii) using the parse tree to rewrite {NR₁,. . . , NR_(n)} in simpler form, until no NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . ,NR_(n)} can be rewritten in simpler form.
 78. The method of claim 2,wherein the engineered nucleic acid construct comprises a first PCRproduct having a first part of the selectable marker, and a second PCRproduct having a second part of the selectable marker, wherein the firstPCR product, oriented in a 5′ to 3′ direction, combines with the secondPCR product, oriented in a 3′ to 5′ direction, to form the engineerednucleic acid construct with the selectable marker, and wherein the oneor more primer pairs comprises a first primer pair and a second primerpair, wherein the first primer pair defines the termini of the first PCRproduct and the second primer pair defines the termini of the second PCRproduct.
 79. The method of claim 1, wherein one or more instances of theinstructions for arranging (C) are performed concurrently.
 80. Themethod of claim 1, wherein the one or more physically present sourceconstructs selected for an AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} collectivelyencode a portion of AR_(i).
 81. The method of claim 80, wherein the oneor more component polynucleotides in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for AR_(i) is less than 90 percent of anucleic acid sequence defined by AR_(i).
 82. The method of claim 80,wherein the one or more component polynucleotides in the one or morephysically present source constructs identified for AR_(i) is less than80 percent of a nucleic acid sequence defined by AR_(i).
 83. The methodof claim 80, wherein the one or more component polynucleotides in theone or more physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i)is less than 60 percent of a nucleic acid sequence defined by AR_(i).84. The method of claim 80, wherein the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(i) is less than 20 percent of a nucleic acid sequencedefined by AR_(i).
 85. The method of claim 1, wherein the selecting (F)further comprises selecting a plurality of contiguous arrangements in{AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, including AR_(f), each contiguous arrangementAR_(i) in the plurality of contiguous arrangements having a score S_(i)that meets a selection criterion, and the calculating (G) furthercomprises calculating, for each respective contiguous arrangement AR_(i)in the plurality of contiguous arrangements, one or more primer pairsbased upon the respective contiguous arrangement, the one or more primerpairs collectively capable of amplifying the portions of the respectivecontiguous arrangement AR_(i) not represented in the one or morecomponent polynucleotides in the physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(i), wherein the portions of the contiguousarrangement amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one ormore component polynucleotides in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for AR_(i), in the order specified in thecontiguous arrangement AR_(i), collectively define an instance of theengineered nucleic acid construct.
 86. The method of claim 85, whereinthe plurality of contiguous arrangements comprises five contiguousarrangements.
 87. The method of claim 85, wherein the plurality ofcontiguous arrangements comprises ten contiguous arrangements.
 88. Themethod of claim 1, wherein the target organism is yeast, E. coli, orbaculovirus.
 89. An apparatus for performing the method of claim
 1. 90.A method of generating a host cell, the method comprising the steps of:(1) assembling an engineered nucleic acid according to the method ofclaim 1; (2) transforming a host cell with the engineered nucleic acidconstruct; and (3) selecting a host cell comprising the engineerednucleic acid construct.
 91. The method of claim 90, wherein theengineered nucleic acid construct comprises a selectable marker having anucleic acid sequence and the selecting (3) comprises propagating thetransformed host cell on selectable media.
 92. The method of claim 90,wherein the receiving a plurality of {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} nucleic acidrequests (A) comprises receiving each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} in electronic alphanumeric format.
 93. Anapparatus comprising one or more memories and one or more processors,wherein the one or more memories and the one or more processors are inelectronic communication with each other, the one or more memoriestangibly encoding a set of instructions for defining an engineerednucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus L of atarget organism or a host cell using the one or more processors, the setof instructions comprising: (A) instructions for receiving a pluralityof nucleic acid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, wherein n is a positiveinteger greater than 1, each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . ., NR_(n)} specifying a genetic change to L; (B) instructions forexpanding each NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into a correspondingcomponent polynucleotide, thereby forming a plurality of componentpolynucleotides; (C) instructions for arranging the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), whereinthe arranging (C) uses linker nucleic acid sequences to combinecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotidesinto a contiguous arrangement AR_(i); (D) instructions for repeating theinstructions for arranging (C) until a set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}contiguous arrangements are formed, wherein m is a positive integergreater than 1, the set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} contiguous arrangementsrepresenting a plurality of different contiguous arrangements of thecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides;(E) instructions for determining a score S_(i) for each respectivecontiguous arrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, wherein, foreach respective contiguous arrangement AR_(i), a contribution to thescore S_(i) is made when one or more source constructs are identified asbeing physically present in a freezer store, wherein each of the one ormore physically present source constructs encodes one or more of thecomponent polynucleotides, and wherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the3′ and 5′ termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in theone or more component polynucleotides encoded by the one or morephysically present source constructs is bound to a corresponding linkerthat was used for the corresponding component polynucleotide in thearranging (C) to form AR_(i); (F) instructions for selecting a finalcontiguous arrangement AR_(f) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} having a scoreS_(i) that meets a selection criterion as an optimal contiguousarrangement; and (G) instructions for calculating, in response tocompletion of the instructions for selecting, one or more primer pairsbased upon the final AR_(f), wherein each primer pair in the one or moreprimer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion of the AR_(f) notrepresented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(f), wherein the portions of the contiguousarrangement amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one ormore component polynucleotides in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for AR_(f), in the order specified in thecontiguous arrangement AR_(f), collectively define the engineerednucleic acid construct.
 94. A method of defining an engineered nucleicacid construct for integration into a genomic locus L of a targetorganism or a host cell, the method comprising: (A) receiving aplurality of nucleic acid requests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, wherein n is apositive integer greater than 1, each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifying a genetic change to L; (B) expandingeach NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into a corresponding componentpolynucleotide, thereby forming a plurality of componentpolynucleotides; (C) arranging the plurality of componentpolynucleotides into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), wherein thearranging (C) uses linker nucleic acid sequences to combine componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides into theAR_(i); (D) selecting, in response to the arranging, one or more sourceconstructs from a plurality of source constructs physically present in afreezer store, wherein each of the one or more physically present sourceconstructs encode one or more of the component polynucleotides, andwherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of eachrespective component polynucleotide in the one or more componentpolynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically present sourceconstructs is bound to a corresponding linker that was used for thecorresponding component polynucleotide in the arranging (C) to form theAR_(i); and (E) calculating one or more primer pairs based upon AR_(i),wherein each primer pair is capable of amplifying a portion of AR_(i)not represented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(i), wherein the portions of the AR_(i) amplified bythe one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), in the order specified by the AR_(i),collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct, wherein atleast one of the expanding (B), arranging (C), selecting (D), andcalculating (E) is performed using one or more suitably programmedcomputers.
 95. The method of claim 94, wherein the arranging (C)comprises inserting a selectable marker having a nucleic acid sequenceinto the contiguous arrangement Ar_(i).
 96. The method of claim 94,wherein a nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifiesinsertion of an insertion sequence at L.
 97. The method of claim 96,wherein the insertion sequence comprises a promoter and a gene to beexpressed by the promoter.
 98. The method of claim 96, wherein theinsertion sequence comprises a divergent promoter and a first gene and asecond gene driven by the divergent promoter.
 99. The method of claim98, wherein the divergent promoter is a back-to-back divergent promoter,an overlapping divergent promoter, or a face-to-face divergent promoter.100. The method of claim 96, wherein the insertion sequence comprises apromoter, a gene, a terminator, an open reading frame, a codonsubstitution, a nucleic acid substitution, a point mutation, aninsertion mutation, or a deletion mutation.
 101. The method of claim 96,wherein the insertion sequence comprises a fusable open reading framewithout a stop codon.
 102. The method of claim 96, wherein the nucleicacid request specifies that the entire genomic locus L is to be replacedby the insertion sequence.
 103. The method of claim 96, wherein thenucleic acid request specifies that a promoter and a gene at L are to bereplaced by the insertion sequence.
 104. The method of claim 96, whereinthe nucleic acid request specifies that a divergent promoter and a firstgene and a second gene driven by the divergent promoter at L are to bereplaced by the insertion sequence.
 105. The method of claim 104,wherein the divergent promoter is a back-to-back divergent promoter, anoverlapping divergent promoter, or a face-to-face divergent promoter.106. The method of claim 96, wherein the nucleic acid request specifiesthat a promoter, a gene, a terminator, an open reading frame, a codonsubstitution, a nucleic acid substitution, a point mutation, aninsertion mutation, or a deletion mutation at L is to be replaced by theinsertion sequence.
 107. The method of claim 96, wherein the nucleicacid request specifies that a fusible open reading frame without a stopcodon is to be replaced by the insertion sequence.
 108. The method ofclaim 96, wherein the insertion sequence includes a first copy of a genein a 3′ to 5′ orientation and a second copy of the gene in a 5′ to 3′orientation, and a bi-directional promoter between the first copy andthe second copy.
 109. The method of claim 94, wherein the arranging (C)comprises barring an AR_(i) that would cause a repeat sequence ofgreater than a predetermined number of bases to arise in the engineerednucleic acid construct.
 110. The method of claim 94, wherein thecalculating (E) comprises applying at least one design rule to identifyprimers in the one or more primer pairs.
 111. The method of claim 110,wherein the at least one design rule is (i) avoidance of hairpintermini, (ii) avoidance of self-dimerization, (iii) a primer lengthbetween 17 and 28 bases, (iv) a percent G+C content between fifty andsixty percent, (v) a melting temperature between 55° C. and 80° C., or(vi) avoidance of runs of three or more cytosine or guanines at the 3′terminus of a primer.
 112. The method of claim 94, wherein a firstcomponent polynucleotide is identical to a second componentpolynucleotide in the plurality of component polynucleotides and whereinthe arranging (C) comprises barring a contiguous arrangement that wouldcause the first component polynucleotide and the second componentpolynucleotide to run in the same direction in the engineered nucleicacid construct.
 113. The method of claim 95, wherein an identity of theselectable marker is received with the plurality of nucleic acidrequests in the receiving (A).
 114. The method of claim 95, wherein anidentity of the selectable marker is determined without humanintervention from a predetermined list of selectable markers by thearranging (C).
 115. The method of claim 94, wherein the calculating (E)comprises encoding a linker nucleic acid sequence from a predeterminedlibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences specified for the AR_(i) intoone or more primers in the one or more primer pairs calculated for theAR_(i).
 116. The method of claim 94, wherein the expanding (B) comprisesexpanding a first nucleic acid request in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into afirst component polynucleotide and a second component polynucleotide,wherein the first component polynucleotide is a promoter and the secondcomponent polynucleotide is a gene.
 117. An apparatus comprising one ormore memories and one or more processors, wherein the one or morememories and the one or more processors are in electronic communicationwith each other, the one or more memories tangibly encoding a set ofinstructions for defining an engineered nucleic acid construct forintegration into a genomic locus L of a target organism or a host cellusing the one or more processors, the set of instructions comprising:(A) instructions for receiving a plurality of nucleic acid requests{NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, wherein n is a positive integer greater than 1,each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} specifying agenetic change to L; (B) instructions for expanding each NR_(i) in {NR₁,. . . , NR_(n)} into a corresponding component polynucleotide having anucleic acid sequence, thereby forming a plurality of componentpolynucleotides; (C) instructions for arranging the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), whereinthe arranging (C) uses linker nucleic acid sequences to combinecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotidesinto a contiguous arrangement AR_(i); (D) instructions for selecting oneor more source constructs from a plurality of source constructsphysically present in a freezer store, wherein each of the one or morephysically present source constructs encode one or more of the componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides, andwherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of eachrespective component polynucleotide in the one or more componentpolynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically present sourceconstructs is bound to a corresponding linker nucleic acid that was usedfor the respective component polynucleotide in the arranging (C) to formthe AR_(i); and (E) instructions for calculating one or more primerpairs based upon the AR_(i), wherein each primer pair in the one or moreprimer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion of the AR_(i) notrepresented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), wherein the portions of the AR_(i) amplifiedby the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), in the order specified by the AR_(i),collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct.
 118. A methodof defining a plurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . .. , EN_(k)}, wherein k is a positive integer greater than 1, eachengineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} forintegration into a genomic locus L of a target organism or a host cell,the method comprising: (A) receiving, for each respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, a corresponding plurality of nucleic acidrequests {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)}, each nucleic acid requestNR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifying a genetic change toL, wherein, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is apositive integer that is the same or different as n for each otherEN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (B) expanding, for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, each NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . ,NR_(i,n)} into a corresponding component polynucleotide having a nucleicacid sequence, thereby forming a corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides; (C) arranging, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . .. , EN_(k)}, the corresponding plurality of component polynucleotidesfrom the expanding (B) into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), wherein thearranging (C) uses linker nucleic acid sequences to combine componentpolynucleotides in the corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming a plurality of contiguousarrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}representing an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (D) selecting, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more sourceconstructs from a plurality of source constructs physically present in afreezer store, wherein each of the one or more physically present sourceconstructs for a respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} encode oneor more of the component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides for the respective EN_(i), and wherein a 3′ or 5′terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of each respective componentpolynucleotide in the one or more component polynucleotides encoded bythe one or more physically present source constructs for a respectiveEN_(i) is bound to a corresponding linker nucleic acid that was used forthe respective component polynucleotide in the arranging (C) to formAR_(i); and (E) calculating, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)} that represents EN_(i), wherein each primer pair in the one ormore primer pairs for an AR_(i) is capable of amplifying a portion ofAR_(i) not represented in the one or more physically present sourceconstructs identified for AR_(i), wherein the portions of the contiguousarrangement AR_(i) amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the oneor more component polynucleotides in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for AR_(i), in the order specified byAR_(i), collectively define the engineered nucleic acid constructEN_(i), wherein at least one of the expanding (B), arranging (C),selecting (D), and calculating (E) is performed using one or moresuitably programmed computers.
 119. The method of claim 118, the methodfurther comprising: (F) synthesizing, for each respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, EN_(i), as defined by the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)} that represents EN_(i), using the one or more primer pairscalculated for AR_(i) in the calculating (E) and the one or morephysically present source constructs selected for AR_(i) in theselecting (D); (G) transforming each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)} synthesized in the synthesizing (F) into a different host cell;and (H) selecting a plurality of host cells, wherein each host cell inthe plurality of host cells comprises an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}such that the plurality of host cells represents at least sixty percentof {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}.
 120. The method of claim 119, wherein theengineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) comprises a selectable markerhaving a nucleic acid sequence and the selecting (H) comprisespropagating the transformed host cell on selectable media.
 121. Themethod of claim 119, wherein the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}engineered nucleic acid constructs comprises one hundred engineerednucleic acid constructs and wherein the transforming (G) is performedwithin two weeks of the expanding (B).
 122. The method of claim 119,wherein the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleic acidconstructs comprises two hundred engineered nucleic acid constructs andwherein the transforming (G) is performed within three weeks of theexpanding (B).
 123. The method of claim 119, wherein the plurality of{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleic acid constructs comprises threehundred engineered nucleic acid constructs and wherein the transforming(G) is performed within three weeks of the expanding (B).
 124. Themethod of claim 119, wherein the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}engineered nucleic acid constructs comprises four hundred engineerednucleic acid constructs and wherein the transforming (G) is performedwithin three weeks of the expanding (B).
 125. The method of claim 119,wherein the plurality of {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleic acidconstructs comprises five hundred engineered nucleic acid constructs andwherein the transforming (G) is performed within three weeks of theexpanding (B).
 126. The method of claim 118 wherein, for at least oneNR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, (i) the arranging (C) comprisesarranging the plurality of corresponding component polynucleotidescorresponding to NR_(i) from the expanding (B) into a set of temporarycontiguous arrangements {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)} wherein, for eachTAR_(i) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, the arranging (C) uses linkernucleic acid sequences from a predetermined library of linker nucleicacid sequences to combine component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides into TAR_(i), (ii) a score S_(k) is determinedfor each respective TAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, wherein, foreach respective TAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, the correspondingscore S_(k) is determined by a method comprising (a) selecting one ormore source constructs from a plurality of source constructs physicallypresent in a freezer store, wherein the one or more constructscollectively encode all a portion of TAR_(k); and (b) calculating S_(k)based on an amount of TAR_(k) represented by the one or more sourceconstructs, and (iii) selecting the contiguous arrangement TAR_(f) in{TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(m)} having a score S_(f) that meets a selectioncriterion as the optimal contiguous arrangement, wherein the selectedTAR_(f) is deemed to be the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) for EN_(i),thereby forming {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)}, wherein each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . .. , AR_(k)} is for a different NR_(m) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}.
 127. Anapparatus comprising one or more memories and one or more processors,wherein the one or more memories and the one or more processors are inelectronic communication with each other, the one or more memoriesencoding a set of instructions for defining a plurality of {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)} engineered nucleic acid constructs, wherein k is a positiveinteger greater than 1, each engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} for integration into a genomic locus L of a targetorganism or a host cell, using the one or more processors, the set ofinstructions comprising: (A) instructions for receiving, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, a corresponding plurality of{NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} nucleic acid requests, each nucleic acidrequest NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifying a geneticchange to L, wherein, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}, n is a positive integer that is the same or different as n foreach other EN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (B) instructions forexpanding, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, eachNR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} into a corresponding componentpolynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence, thereby forming acorresponding plurality of component polynucleotides for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (C) instructions for arranging, foreach respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, the correspondingplurality of component polynucleotides from the expanding (B) into acontiguous arrangement AR_(i), wherein the arranging (C) uses linkernucleic acid sequences to combine component polynucleotides in thecorresponding plurality of component polynucleotides into AR_(i),thereby forming a plurality of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . ,AR_(m)}, each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} representing a EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (D) instructions for selecting, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more sourceconstructs from a plurality of source constructs physically present in afreezer store, wherein each of the one or more physically present sourceconstructs for a respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} encode oneor more of the component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides for the respective EN_(i), and wherein a 3′ or 5′terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of each respective componentpolynucleotide in the one or more component polynucleotides encoded bythe one or more physically present source constructs for a respectiveEN_(i) is bound to a corresponding linker nucleic acid that was used forthe respective component polynucleotide in the arranging (C) to formAR_(i); and (E) instructions for calculating, for each respective EN_(i)in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon the AR_(i)in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} that represents EN_(i), wherein each primerpair in the one or more primer pairs is capable of amplifying a portionof AR_(i) not represented in the one or more physically present sourceconstructs identified for AR_(i), wherein the portions of AR_(i)amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for AR_(i), in the order specified by AR_(i), collectivelydefine the engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i).
 128. An apparatuscomprising one or more memories and one or more processors, wherein theone or more memories and the one or more processors are in electroniccommunication with each other, the one or more memories encoding a setof instructions for defining a plurality of engineered nucleic acidconstructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, wherein k is an integer greater than1, each engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)} for integration into a genomic locus L of a target organism or ahost cell, the set of instructions comprising: (A) instructions forreceiving, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, acorresponding plurality of nucleic acid requests {NR_(i,1), . . . ,NR_(i,n)} in digital alphanumeric format, each nucleic acid requestNR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifying a genetic change toL, wherein, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is apositive integer that is the same or different as n for each otherEN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (B) instructions for expanding, foreach respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, each NR_(i,j) in{NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} into a corresponding componentpolynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence, thereby forming acorresponding plurality of component polynucleotides for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (C) instructions for arranging, foreach respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, the correspondingplurality of component polynucleotides from the instructions forexpanding (B) into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), wherein theinstructions for arranging (C) use linker nucleic acid sequences tocombine component polynucleotides in the plurality of correspondingcomponent polynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming a plurality ofcontiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . .. , AR_(m)} representing an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (D)instructions for selecting, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}, one or more source constructs from a plurality of sourceconstructs physically present in a freezer store, wherein each of theone or more physically present source constructs for a respective EN_(i)in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} encode one or more of the componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides for therespective EN_(i), and wherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and5′ termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in the one ormore component polynucleotides encoded by the one or more physicallypresent source constructs for a respective EN_(i) is bound to acorresponding linker nucleic acid that was used for the respectivecomponent polynucleotide in the arranging (C) to form AR_(i); and (E)instructions for calculating, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . ., EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . ., AR_(m)} that represents EN_(i), wherein each primer pair in the one ormore primer pairs for an AR_(i) is capable of amplifying a portion ofAR_(i) not represented in the one or more source constructs identifiedfor AR_(i), wherein the portions of AR_(i) amplified by the one or moreprimer pairs and the one or more component polynucleotides in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i), in theorder specified by AR_(i), collectively define the engineered nucleicacid construct EN_(i).
 129. The apparatus of claim 128, wherein the setof instructions further comprises: (F) instructions for outputting to anon-volatile computer memory, a non-transitory computer memory, apersistent data storage, a monitor, or a printer, for each respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon theAR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} that represents EN_(i), and the one ormore source constructs identified by the instructions for calculating(E) for E_(i).
 130. The apparatus of claim 128 wherein, for each NR_(i)in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, (i) the instructions for arranging (C)comprise instructions for arranging the plurality of correspondingcomponent polynucleotides corresponding to NR_(i) from the instructionsfor expanding (B) into a set of temporary contiguous arrangements {TAR₁,. . . , TAR_(z)} wherein z is a positive integer greater than 1 andwherein, for each TAR_(i) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, the instructionsfor arranging (C) uses linker nucleic acid sequences from apredetermined library of linker nucleic acid sequences to combinecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotidesinto TAR_(i), (ii) a score S_(k) is determined for each respectiveTAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, wherein, for each respective TAR_(k)in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, the corresponding score S_(k) is determinedby a method comprising (a) selecting one or more source constructs froma plurality of source constructs physically present in a freezer store,wherein the one or more constructs collectively encode all a portion ofTAR_(k); and (b) calculating S_(k) based on an amount of TAR_(k)represented by the one or more source constructs, and (iii) selectingthe contiguous arrangement TAR_(f) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)} having ascore S_(f) that meets a selection criterion as the optimal contiguousarrangement, wherein the selected TAR_(f) is deemed to be the contiguousarrangement AR_(i) for EN_(i), thereby forming {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)},wherein each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} is for a different NR_(m)in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}.
 131. A method for defining a plurality of{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} engineered nucleic acid constructs, wherein k isan integer greater than 1, each engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i)in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} for integration into a genomic locus L of atarget organism or a host cell, the method comprising: (A) receiving,for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, a correspondingplurality of {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} nucleic acid requests indigital alphanumeric format, each nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in{NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} specifying a genetic change to L, wherein,for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is a positiveinteger that is the same or different as n for each other EN_(m) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (B) expanding, for each respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, each NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)}into a corresponding component polynucleotide having a nucleic acidsequence, thereby forming a corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (C)arranging, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, thecorresponding plurality of component polynucleotides from the expanding(B) into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), wherein the arranging (C) useslinker nucleic acid sequences to combine component polynucleotides inthe plurality of corresponding component polynucleotides into AR_(i),thereby forming a plurality of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . .AR_(k)}, each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} representing an EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (D) selecting, for each respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more source constructs from a plurality ofsource constructs physically present in a freezer store, wherein the oneor more physically present source constructs collectively encode aportion of the AR_(i) corresponding to EN_(i); (E) calculating, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairsbased upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} that represents therespective EN_(i), wherein each primer pair in the one or more primerpairs is capable of amplifying a portion of AR_(i) not represented inthe one or more physically present source constructs identified forAR_(i), wherein the portions of AR_(i) amplified by the one or moreprimer pairs and the one or more component polynucleotides in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i), in theorder specified by AR_(i), collectively define the engineered nucleicacid construct EN_(i); and (F) outputting to a non-transitory computermemory, a persistent data storage, a monitor, or a printer, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairsbased upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . . AR_(k)} that represents therespective EN_(i), and the one or more source constructs identified bythe calculating (E) for the respective EN_(i), wherein at least one ofthe expanding (B), arranging (C), selecting (D) or calculating (E) isperformed using a suitably programmed computer.
 132. The method of claim131 wherein, for each NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, (i) the arranging(C) comprises arranging the plurality of corresponding componentpolynucleotides corresponding to NR_(i) from the expanding (B) into aset of temporary contiguous arrangements {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}wherein, for each TAR_(i) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, the arranging (C)uses linker nucleic acid sequences from a predetermined library oflinker nucleic acid sequences to combine component polynucleotides inthe plurality of component polynucleotides into TAR_(i), (ii) a scoreS_(k) is determined for each respective TAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . ,TAR_(z)}, wherein z is a positive integer greater than 1, wherein, foreach respective TAR_(k) in {TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)}, the correspondingscore S_(k) is determined by a method comprising (a) selecting one ormore source constructs from a plurality of source constructs physicallypresent in a freezer store, wherein the one or more constructscollectively encode all a portion of TAR_(k); and (b) calculating S_(k)based on an amount of TAR_(k) represented by the one or more sourceconstructs, and (iii) selecting the contiguous arrangement TAR_(f) in{TAR₁, . . . , TAR_(z)} having a score S_(f) that meets a selectioncriterion as the optimal contiguous arrangement, wherein the selectedTAR_(f) is deemed to be the contiguous arrangement AR_(i) for EN_(i),thereby forming {AR₁, . . . , AR_(k)}, wherein each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . .. , AR_(k)} is for a different NR_(q) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}.
 133. Themethod of claim 131, wherein k is ten or greater.
 134. The method ofclaim 131, wherein k is one hundred or greater.
 135. The method of claim131, wherein k is one thousand or greater.
 136. An apparatus comprisingone or more memories and one or more processors, wherein the one or morememories and the one or more processors are in electronic communicationwith each other, the one or more memories encoding a set of instructionsfor defining an engineered nucleic acid construct for integration into agenomic locus L of a target organism or a host cell, using the one ormore processors, the set of instructions comprising: (A) instructionsfor listing as a table on a display in electronic communication with theone or more processors, a first plurality of component polynucleotidesphysically present in a freezer store; (B) instructions for receiving afirst selection of a first component polynucleotide from the table by auser; (C) instructions for displaying, responsive to the firstselection, an icon on the display for the first componentpolynucleotide, wherein the icon for the first component polynucleotidespecifies an identity of a 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence and anidentity of a 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence bound to the firstcomponent polynucleotide, wherein the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequenceand the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence are present in an electroniclibrary of linker nucleic acid sequences that is stored innon-transitory form in the one or more memories; and (D) instructionsfor updating the table on the display, responsive to the firstselection, to list a second plurality of component polynucleotidesphysically present in a freezer store, wherein each componentpolynucleotide in the second plurality of component polynucleotidescomprises a 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence or a 3′ linker nucleic acidsequence that upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence orthe complement of the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence of the firstcomponent polynucleotide; (E) instructions for receiving a secondselection of a second component polynucleotide from the table by a user;(F) instructions for displaying, responsive to the second selection, anicon on the display for the second component polynucleotide, wherein theicon for the second component polynucleotide specifies an identity ofthe 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence and an identity of a the ′ linkernucleic acid sequence bound to the second component polynucleotide;wherein when the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence of the second componentpolynucleotide upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of the 3′ linker of the first componentpolynucleotide, the second icon is shown to the right of the first iconon the display, and when the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence of thesecond component polynucleotide upon denaturation to single strandedform, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of the 5′ linker ofthe first component polynucleotide, the second icon is shown to the leftof the first icon on the display, and wherein the defined engineerednucleic acid construct comprises the first component polynucleotide andthe second component polynucleotide.
 137. The apparatus of claim 136,wherein the electronic library of linker nucleic acid sequences consistsof 100 linker nucleic acid sequences or less.
 138. The apparatus ofclaim 136, wherein the electronic library of linker nucleic acidsequences consists of 50 linker nucleic acid sequences or less.
 139. Theapparatus of claim 136, wherein the engineered nucleic acid constructcomprises, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation,A=an ordered set of component polynucleotides {X₁, . . . ,X_(n)} havingthe sequential order displayed in the display, wherein, n is a positiveinteger greater than 1, each i is an integer in the set of integers {1,. . . , n}, each X_(i) comprises 5′-LA_(i)-NA_(i)-LB_(i)-3′, each LB_(i)is a linker nucleic acid sequence in the electronic library of linkernucleic acid sequences, each NA_(i) is a component polynucleotide, eachLB_(i), for i less than n, upon denaturation to single stranded form, iscapable of hybridizing to the complement of LA_(i+1), thereby formingthe engineered nucleic acid construct comprising the nucleic acidsequence: 5′-LA₁-NA₁, . . . , LB_(n−1)-NA_(n)-LB_(n)-3′.
 140. Theapparatus of claim 139, wherein:B=NA₀-LB₀, andC=LA_(n+1)-NA_(n+1), wherein LB₀ is a linker nucleic acid sequence inthe electronic library of linker nucleic acid sequences, NA₀ andNA_(n+1) are each component polynucleotides, the contiguous arrangementAR_(i) comprising, in a 5′ to 3′ orientation,A,B,C, and wherein LB₀, upon denaturation to single stranded form, iscapable of hybridizing to the complement of LA₁, and LB_(n), upondenaturation to single stranded form, is capable of hybridizing to thecomplement of LA_(n+1), so that the engineered nucleic acid constructcomprises the nucleic acid sequence: 5′-NA₀-LB_(O), . . . ,LB_(n−1)-NA_(n)-LB_(n)-NA_(n+1)-3′.
 141. An apparatus comprising one ormore memories and one or more processors, wherein the one or morememories and the one or more processors are in electronic communicationwith each other, the one or more memories encoding a set of instructionsfor determining whether a nucleic acid sequence is present in any sourceconstruct in a plurality of source constructs physically present in afreezer store, using the one or more processors, the set of instructionscomprising: (A) instructions for receiving a first nucleic acid sequencein electronic alphanumeric format using a display in electroniccommunication with the one or more memories; (B) instructions forreceiving a matching threshold criterion using the display; and (C)instructions for comparing the first nucleic acid sequence with asequence of each respective source construct in the plurality of sourceconstructs, wherein, when a second nucleic acid sequence that satisfiesthe matching threshold criterion is found within the sequence of arespective source construct, the instructions for comparing furtherinclude instructions for displaying an identity of the respective sourceconstruct.
 142. The apparatus of claim 141, wherein the matchingthreshold criterion is 100 percent sequence identity.
 143. The apparatusof claim 141, wherein the matching threshold criterion is at least 90percent identity.
 144. The apparatus of claim 141, wherein the pluralityof source constructs comprises 1000 source constructs.
 145. Theapparatus of claim 141, wherein the plurality of source constructscomprises 10,000 source constructs.
 146. The apparatus of claim 141,wherein the plurality of source constructs comprises 100,000 sourceconstructs.
 147. The apparatus of claim 141 wherein, when a secondnucleic acid sequence that satisfies the matching threshold criterion isfound within the sequence of a respective source construct, theinstructions for comparing further include instructions for displayingan alignment of the second nucleic acid sequence against the firstnucleic acid sequence.
 148. A non-transitory computer readable storagemedium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one ormore processors of a system, the one or more programs for defining anengineered nucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus Lof a target organism or a host cell, the one or more programscomprising: (A) instructions for receiving a plurality of nucleic acidrequests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, wherein n is a positive integer greaterthan 1, each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifying a genetic change to L; (B) instructions for expanding eachNR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into a corresponding componentpolynucleotide, thereby forming a plurality of componentpolynucleotides; (C) instructions for arranging the plurality ofcomponent polynucleotides into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), whereinthe arranging (C) uses linker nucleic acid sequences to combinecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotidesinto a contiguous arrangement AR_(i); (D) instructions for repeating theinstructions for arranging (C) until a set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}contiguous arrangements are formed, wherein m is a positive integergreater than 1, the set of {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} contiguous arrangementsrepresenting a plurality of different contiguous arrangements of thecomponent polynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides;(E) instructions for determining a score S_(i) for each respectivecontiguous arrangement AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, wherein, foreach respective contiguous arrangement AR_(i), a contribution to thescore S_(i) is made when one or more source constructs are identified asbeing physically present in a freezer store, wherein each of the one ormore physically present source constructs encodes one or more of thecomponent polynucleotides, and wherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the3′ and 5′ termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in theone or more component polynucleotides encoded by the one or morephysically present source constructs is bound to a corresponding linkerthat was used for the corresponding component polynucleotide in thearranging (C) to form AR_(i); (F) instructions for selecting a finalcontiguous arrangement AR_(f) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} having a scoreS_(i) that meets a selection criterion as an optimal contiguousarrangement; and (G) instructions for calculating, in response tocompletion of the instructions for selecting, one or more primer pairsbased upon the final AR_(f), wherein each primer pair in the one or moreprimer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion of the AR_(f) notrepresented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(f), wherein the portions of the contiguousarrangement amplified by the one or more primer pairs and the one ormore component polynucleotides in the one or more physically presentsource constructs identified for AR_(f), in the order specified in thecontiguous arrangement AR_(f), collectively define the engineerednucleic acid construct.
 149. A non-transitory computer readable storagemedium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one ormore processors of a system, the one or more programs for defining anengineered nucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus Lof a target organism or a host cell, the one or more programscomprising: (A) instructions for receiving a plurality of nucleic acidrequests {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}, wherein n is a positive integer greaterthan 1, each nucleic acid request NR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)}specifying a genetic change to L; (B) instructions for expanding eachNR_(i) in {NR₁, . . . , NR_(n)} into a corresponding componentpolynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence, thereby forming aplurality of component polynucleotides; (C) instructions for arrangingthe plurality of component polynucleotides into a contiguous arrangementAR_(i), wherein the arranging (C) uses linker nucleic acid sequences tocombine component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i); (D) instructionsfor selecting one or more source constructs from a plurality of sourceconstructs physically present in a freezer store, wherein each of theone or more physically present source constructs encode one or more ofthe component polynucleotides in the plurality of componentpolynucleotides, and wherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in the one or morecomponent polynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically presentsource constructs is bound to a corresponding linker nucleic acid thatwas used for the respective component polynucleotide in the arranging(C) to form the AR_(i); and (E) instructions for calculating one or moreprimer pairs based upon the AR_(i), wherein each primer pair in the oneor more primer pairs is capable of amplifying a portion of the AR_(i)not represented in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), wherein the portions of the AR_(i) amplifiedby the one or more primer pairs and the one or more componentpolynucleotides in the one or more physically present source constructsidentified for the AR_(i), in the order specified by the AR_(i),collectively define the engineered nucleic acid construct.
 150. Anon-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or moreprograms configured for execution by one or more processors of a system,the one or more programs for defining a plurality of {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)} engineered nucleic acid constructs, wherein k is a positiveinteger greater than 1, each engineered nucleic acid construct EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} for integration into a genomic locus L of a targetorganism or a host cell, the one or more programs comprising: (A)instructions for receiving, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}, a corresponding plurality of {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)}nucleic acid requests, each nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1),. . . , NR_(i,n)} specifying a genetic change to L, wherein, for eachrespective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is a positive integer thatis the same or different as n for each other EN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}; (B) instructions for expanding, for each respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, each NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)}into a corresponding component polynucleotide having a nucleic acidsequence, thereby forming a corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (C)instructions for arranging, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}, the corresponding plurality of component polynucleotides fromthe expanding (B) into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i), wherein thearranging (C) uses linker nucleic acid sequences to combine componentpolynucleotides in the corresponding plurality of componentpolynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming a plurality of contiguousarrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}representing a EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (D) instructions forselecting, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one ormore source constructs from a plurality of source constructs physicallypresent in a freezer store, wherein each of the one or more physicallypresent source constructs for a respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)} encode one or more of the component polynucleotides in theplurality of component polynucleotides for the respective EN_(i), andwherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and 5′ termini, of eachrespective component polynucleotide in the one or more componentpolynucleotides encoded by the one or more physically present sourceconstructs for a respective EN_(i) is bound to a corresponding linkernucleic acid that was used for the respective component polynucleotidein the arranging (C) to form AR_(i); and (E) instructions forcalculating, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one ormore primer pairs based upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} thatrepresents EN_(i), wherein each primer pair in the one or more primerpairs is capable of amplifying a portion of AR_(i) not represented inthe one or more physically present source constructs identified forAR_(i), wherein the portions of AR_(i) amplified by the one or moreprimer pairs and the one or more component polynucleotides in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i), in theorder specified by AR_(i), collectively define the engineered nucleicacid construct EN_(i).
 151. A non-transitory computer readable storagemedium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one ormore processors of a system, the one or more programs for defining aplurality of engineered nucleic acid constructs {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)},wherein k is an integer greater than 1, each engineered nucleic acidconstruct EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} for integration into a genomiclocus L of a target organism or a host cell, the one or more programscomprising: (A) instructions for receiving, for each respective EN_(i)in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, a corresponding plurality of nucleic acidrequests {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} in digital alphanumeric format,each nucleic acid request NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)}specifying a genetic change to L, wherein, for each respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, n is a positive integer that is the same ordifferent as n for each other EN_(m) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (B)instructions for expanding, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}, each NR_(i,j) in {NR_(i,1), . . . , NR_(i,n)} into acorresponding component polynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence,thereby forming a corresponding plurality of component polynucleotidesfor each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}; (C) instructionsfor arranging, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, thecorresponding plurality of component polynucleotides from theinstructions for expanding (B) into a contiguous arrangement AR_(i),wherein the instructions for arranging (C) use linker nucleic acidsequences to combine component polynucleotides in the plurality ofcorresponding component polynucleotides into AR_(i), thereby forming aplurality of contiguous arrangements {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)}, each AR_(i)in {AR₁, . . . , AR_(m)} representing an EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . ,EN_(k)}; (D) instructions for selecting, for each respective EN_(i) in{EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)}, one or more source constructs from a plurality ofsource constructs physically present in a freezer store, wherein each ofthe one or more physically present source constructs for a respectiveEN_(i) in {EN₁, . . . , EN_(k)} encode one or more of the componentpolynucleotides in the plurality of component polynucleotides for therespective EN_(i), and wherein a 3′ or 5′ terminus, or both the 3′ and5′ termini, of each respective component polynucleotide in the one ormore component polynucleotides encoded by the one or more physicallypresent source constructs for a respective EN_(i) is bound to acorresponding linker nucleic acid that was used for the respectivecomponent polynucleotide in the arranging (C) to form AR_(i); and (E)instructions for calculating, for each respective EN_(i) in {EN₁, . . ., EN_(k)}, one or more primer pairs based upon the AR_(i) in {AR₁, . . ., AR_(m)} that represents EN_(i), wherein each primer pair in the one ormore primer pairs for an AR_(i) is capable of amplifying a portion ofAR_(i) not represented in the one or more source constructs identifiedfor AR_(i), wherein the portions of AR_(i) amplified by the one or moreprimer pairs and the one or more component polynucleotides in the one ormore physically present source constructs identified for AR_(i), in theorder specified by AR_(i), collectively define the engineered nucleicacid construct EN_(i).
 152. A non-transitory computer readable storagemedium storing one or more programs configured for execution by one ormore processors of a system, the one or more programs defining anengineered nucleic acid construct for integration into a genomic locus Lof a target organism or a host cell, the one or more programscomprising: (A) instructions for listing as a table on a display a firstplurality of component polynucleotides physically present in a freezerstore; (B) instructions for receiving a first selection of a firstcomponent polynucleotide from the table by a user; (C) instructions fordisplaying, responsive to the first selection, an icon on the displayfor the first component polynucleotide, wherein the icon for the firstcomponent polynucleotide specifies an identity of a 5′ linker nucleicacid sequence and an identity of a 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence boundto the first component polynucleotide, wherein the 5′ linker nucleicacid sequence and the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence are present in anelectronic library of linker nucleic acid sequences that is stored innon-transitory form in the one or more memories; and (D) instructionsfor updating the table on the display, responsive to the firstselection, to list a second plurality of component polynucleotidesphysically present in a freezer store, wherein each componentpolynucleotide in the second plurality of component polynucleotidescomprises a 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence or a 3′ linker nucleic acidsequence that upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence orthe complement of the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence of the firstcomponent polynucleotide; (E) instructions for receiving a secondselection of a second component polynucleotide from the table by a user;(F) instructions for displaying, responsive to the second selection, anicon on the display for the second component polynucleotide, wherein theicon for the second component polynucleotide specifies an identity ofthe 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence and an identity of a the ′ linkernucleic acid sequence bound to the second component polynucleotide;wherein when the 5′ linker nucleic acid sequence of the second componentpolynucleotide upon denaturation to single stranded form, is capable ofhybridizing to the complement of the 3′ linker of the first componentpolynucleotide, the second icon is shown to the right of the first iconon the display, and when the 3′ linker nucleic acid sequence of thesecond component polynucleotide upon denaturation to single strandedform, is capable of hybridizing to the complement of the 5′ linker ofthe first component polynucleotide, the second icon is shown to the leftof the first icon on the display, and wherein the defined engineerednucleic acid construct comprises the first component polynucleotide andthe second component polynucleotide.
 153. A non-transitory computerreadable storage medium storing one or more programs configured forexecution by one or more processors of a system, the one or moreprograms determining whether a nucleic acid sequence is present in anysource construct in a plurality of source constructs physically presentin a freezer store, the one or more programs comprising: (A)instructions for receiving a first nucleic acid sequence in electronicalphanumeric format using a display in electronic communication with theone or more memories; (B) instructions for receiving a matchingthreshold criterion using the display; and (C) instructions forcomparing the first nucleic acid sequence with a sequence of eachrespective source construct in the plurality of source constructs,wherein, when a second nucleic acid sequence that satisfies the matchingthreshold criterion is found within the sequence of a respective sourceconstruct, the instructions for comparing further include instructionsfor displaying an identity of the respective source construct.